Download
Share
Print this page
NEC UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. NEC Manuals
  4. VoIP
  5. Univerge SV9100
  6. System hardware manual
NEC UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual

NEC UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for UNIVERGE SV9100:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Table Of Contents
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
SV 9100
®
System Hardware Manual
NDA-31577
ISSUE 10.0
(Version 10.00)

Advertisement

loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the UNIVERGE SV9100 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for NEC UNIVERGE SV9100

Summary of Contents for NEC UNIVERGE SV9100

  • Page 1 SV 9100 ® System Hardware Manual NDA-31577 ISSUE 10.0 (Version 10.00)
  • Page 3 NEC Enterprise Communication Technologies, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC Enterprise Communication Technologies, Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval of NEC Enterprise Communication Technologies, Inc. term , NEAX and UNIVERGE are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
  • Page 5 The UNIVERGE SV9100 system provides what the customer needs today, and as business expands the system can be expanded to grow as well. The UNIVERGE SV9100 system has a set of manuals that provides all the information necessary to install and support the system. This preface describes these manuals.
  • Page 6 Chapter 5 – Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones This chapter provides information about the UNIVERGE SV9100 system digital and IP terminals in addition to the single line telephones, cordless telephones and wireless telephones. Chapter 6 – Installing SV9100 Cordless Telephones This chapter provides information regarding cordless telephones that can be used in conjunction with the UNIVERGE SV9100 system.
  • Page 7 UNIVERGE SV9100 PC Programming Manual This manual describes the operation of the PCPro program for the SV9100 system. This program is a user-friendly Windows application that allows the user to program and configure features of the SV9100 system from the PC environment.
  • Page 9 Trunk/Port/Channel Capacities ............2-5 System Chassis Capacities............2-11 Blade Capacities ................2-13 Section 4 Licensing ....................2-20 Section 5 NEC External Solutions ................. 2-25 Section 6 Power-Based Calculator Chart ............. 2-25 Section 7 System Requirements and Specifications........... 2-32 Cabling ..................2-32 Power Requirements..............
  • Page 10 Issue 10.0 Product Reliability ................. 2-40 Transmission, Network, and Control Specifications...... 2-43 7.6.1 Transmission ................2-43 7.6.2 Network..................2-43 7.6.3 Control ..................2-43 Dialing Specifications ..............2-44 7.7.1 Dial Pulse Address Signaling ............2-44 7.7.2 Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Address Signaling ....2-44 7.7.3 External Equipment Connection ..........
  • Page 11 Issue 10.0 Selecting the Best Location for Proper Installation......3-2 2.3.1 Selecting the Chassis Installation Site ........... 3-2 2.3.2 Selecting a Permanent MDF Location ........... 3-3 2.3.3 Selecting a Site for Installing the Telephones........ 3-3 Constructing the Main Distribution Frame (MDF)......3-3 Power Failure Transfer..............
  • Page 12 Issue 10.0 Installing the 9.5” Base (CHS2UG B) and Expansion (CHS2UG E) Chassis..............3-24 3.5.1 Connecting the 9.5” Base and Expansion Chassis ..... 3-25 3.5.2 Installing Expansion Blades in the 9.5” Base and Expansion Chassis (Optional) ............... 3-29 3.5.2.1 Connector Pin-Out on GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20/GPZ-BS11..3-30 3.5.2.2 Install the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 Expansion Base Blade in the CHS2UG B Controlling Chassis........3-30...
  • Page 13 Issue 10.0 5.1.2 Multiple CHS2UG Chassis Installation......... 3-71 Section 6 Stand Mounting the Chassis..............3-72 Stand Mounting the 19” (CHS2UG) Chassis......... 3-72 6.1.1 CHS2UG Chassis Installation ............3-72 6.1.2 Multiple CHS2UG Chassis Installation......... 3-75 Stand Mounting the 9.5” CHS2UG B Chassis....... 3-78 Section 7 Rack Mounting the Chassis ..............
  • Page 14 Issue 10.0 10.1.2 Install Cooling Fan ..............3-115 Chapter 4 Installing the SV9100 Blades Section 1 General Information................. 4-1 Slot Locations.................. 4-1 Section 2 Installation ....................4-4 Installation and Safety Precautions ..........4-4 Installing an Extension or Trunk Blade..........4-5 2.2.1 Installing the Blades ..............
  • Page 15 Issue 10.0 3.1.2 Installation..................4-19 3.1.2.1 Battery Installation and Removal ..........4-19 3.1.2.2 GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board Installation ........4-21 3.1.2.3 SD-A1/SD-B1 Installation ............4-21 3.1.2.4 Background Music (BGM) or Music on Hold (MOH) ....4-21 3.1.3 Switch Settings ................4-22 3.1.4 LED Indications................4-23 3.1.5 Connectors...................
  • Page 16 Issue 10.0 4.2.2 Installation..................4-49 4.2.3 GPZ-8DLCB Daughter Board Cable Connection......4-49 GCD-4LCA/GCD-8LCA (4-Port/8-Port Single Line Interface) ..4-51 4.3.1 Description................... 4-51 4.3.2 Installation................... 4-52 4.3.3 LED Indications................4-53 4.3.4 Connectors .................. 4-53 GPZ-4LCA/GPZ-8LCE (4-Port/8-Port SLI Daughter Board) ..4-55 4.4.1 Description...................
  • Page 17 Issue 10.0 5.1.4 Connectors................... 4-71 GPZ-4COTF or GPZ-4COTF-A (4 Loop and Ground Start Interface Daughter Board)............4-73 5.2.1 Description ................... 4-73 5.2.2 Installation..................4-74 5.2.3 Connectors................... 4-74 GCD-2BRIA (2 Basic Rate Interface) ..........4-76 5.3.1 Description ................... 4-76 5.3.2 Installation..................4-77 5.3.3 LED Indications................
  • Page 18 Issue 10.0 Section 6 Optional Blades..................4-98 GCD-VM00 (Voice Mail and Server) ..........4-98 6.1.1 Description................... 4-98 6.1.2 Installation..................4-99 6.1.3 LED Indications................4-100 6.1.3.1 Active LED – Green ..............4-100 6.1.3.2 Busy LED – Red ..............4-101 6.1.3.3 Application LED – Red/Green (Dual Color) ......4-101 6.1.3.4 CompactFlash Card Activity LED –...
  • Page 19 Issue 10.0 6.4.5 LED Indications................4-113 6.4.6 Connectors................. 4-114 GCD-ETIA (Gigabit PoE Switch) ..........4-115 6.5.1 Description ................. 4-115 6.5.2 Installation.................. 4-116 6.5.2.1 Stacking Architecture ............4-116 6.5.2.2 GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 IP Address Assignment ....4-117 6.5.2.3 Group Formation..............4-117 6.5.2.4 Port Number Determination ..........4-117 6.5.2.5 Unmanaged Switch Functions ..........4-118 6.5.3 LED Indications................
  • Page 20 Issue 10.0 6.7.4.3 SSD Active LED..............4-126 6.7.4.4 Ethernet Port LEDs...............4-126 6.7.5 Connectors ................4-126 6.7.5.1 Display Port Video Interface ..........4-126 6.7.5.2 USB Interface ...............4-126 6.7.5.3 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T Ethernet Interface ..4-127 6.7.6 Jumper and DIP Switches ............4-127 6.7.6.1 Jumper J_CMOS1 ..............4-127 6.7.6.2 DIP Switches –...
  • Page 21 Issue 10.0 2.2.1 DTZ-2E-3 (BK) TEL ..............5-26 2.2.2 DTZ-6DE-3 (BK) TEL..............5-27 2.2.3 DTZ-12D-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL............5-28 2.2.4 DTZ-24D-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL............5-29 2.2.5 DTZ-8LD-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL............5-30 DT500 Series Digital Multiline Terminals ........5-31 2.3.1 DTK-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL............5-31 2.3.2 DTK-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL............
  • Page 22 Issue 10.0 DT900 Series IP Multiline Terminals..........5-53 3.3.1 ITK-6D-1 (BK) TEL ..............5-53 3.3.2 ITK-12D-1 (BK) TEL ..............5-54 3.3.3 ITK-8LCX-1 (BK) TEL ..............5-55 3.3.4 ITK-8TCGX-1 (BK) TEL ............... 5-56 3.3.5 ITK-24CG-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL ............5-58 Section 4 Install Multiline Terminals ..............
  • Page 23 Issue 10.0 Adjusting the Height on the Multiline Terminal ......5-71 4.5.1 Adjusting the Height on the DT300/DT400/DT700/DT800 Multiline Terminals ............... 5-71 4.5.2 Adjusting the Height on the DT500/DT900 Multiline Terminals ... 5-72 Removing or Installing the Tilt Legs on the Multiline Terminal ..5-73 4.6.1 Remove Tilt Legs .................
  • Page 24 Issue 10.0 5.2.1.1 Installing the 8LK-L UNIT............5-93 5.2.2 8LK-K UNIT (BK/WH) ..............5-95 5.2.2.1 Installing the 8LK-K UNIT ............5-95 5.2.3 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT (BK/WH) ............5-99 5.2.3.1 Installing the 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT ..........5-99 5.2.4 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT (BK/WH)............5-103 5.2.4.1 Installing the 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT..........5-103 5.2.5 Installing Line Key Kit (12LK-L KIT)...........
  • Page 25 Issue 10.0 5.2.14 DCK-60-1 CONSOLE (BK/WH) ..........5-135 5.2.14.1 Installing the DCK-60-1 CONSOLE with Multiline Terminal................5-135 5.2.14.2 Installing the DCK-60-1 CONSOLE as Standalone Console.................5-141 5.2.15 LCD (BL)-L UNIT (BK/WH) ............5-143 5.2.16 LCD (BL)-Z UNIT (BK/WH) ............5-143 5.2.17 PANEL( )-L UNIT ..............5-143 5.2.18 WM-L UNIT ................
  • Page 26 Issue 10.0 Section 8 Single Line Telephones............... 5-166 AT-50 ..................5-166 8.1.1 AT-50 Platform Information............5-166 8.1.2 AT-50 (Front View) ..............5-166 8.1.3 AT-50 (Rear View) ..............5-167 8.1.4 Wall Mounting the AT-50 ............5-167 AT-55 ..................5-169 8.2.1 AT-55 Platform Information............5-169 8.2.2 AT-55 (Front View) ..............
  • Page 27 Issue 10.0 term ® Section 3 Cordless Repeater DTL-RPT-1 ..........6-14 Setting Up Your Repeater ............. 6-17 3.1.1 Changing the Telephone System PIN.......... 6-17 3.1.2 Automatic Registration..............6-17 3.1.3 Manual Registration ..............6-18 3.1.4 Registering to a Different Base ............ 6-19 Installing the Repeater ..............
  • Page 28 Headset (MX250)............ 6-53 term ® 7.2.2 NEC D Cordless Phone Headset (M175) ......6-54 term ® 7.2.3 NEC D NEC Polaris SupraPlus™ ........6-54 term ® 7.2.4 NEC D NEC Polaris Mirage ®..........6-55 term ® 7.2.5 NEC D NEC Polaris TriStar ®..........6-55...
  • Page 29 Issue 10.0 term ® 7.2.6 NEC D NEC Polaris Encore ® ..........6-56 Chapter 7 Installing SV9100 Wireless Telephones Section 1 General Description ................. 7-1 Section 2 NEC SIP DECT Solutions................. 7-1 Installation ..................7-2 Handsets ..................7-2 2.2.1 SIP DECT G955................7-3 2.2.1.1...
  • Page 30 Powering on the Handset.............. 7-25 Chapter 8 Installing SV9100 Conference Solutions Section 1 General Description................. 8-1 Section 2 NEC SIP Conference Max................ 8-1 Installation ..................8-1 Connecting and Charging the Batteries .......... 8-3 Keypad Functions ................8-3 Programming Options ..............8-4 Compliance ..................
  • Page 31 Issue 10.0 Installing an External Page System..........9-16 Section 6 External Paging and Door Box/Page Relays ........9-18 External Page Relays..............9-18 Door Box /External Page Relay Contacts ........9-18 6.2.1 Connecting a Contact Relay Device to a Door Box/External Page Relay ..................
  • Page 32 Issue 10.0 11.3.5 About Tab ..................9-38 11.3.6 Options Tab ................. 9-39 11.3.7 File Management Tab..............9-41 11.3.8 Custom Program Settings............9-42 11.4 Operation Note................9-44 11.5 4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit ............. 9-45 11.5.1 Description................... 9-45 11.5.2 Connection Configuration ............9-45 11.5.3 Connectors ..................
  • Page 33 12.2.5 Hardware and Software Requirements........9-78 12.2.6 Installation..................9-79 12.2.6.1 Location Preparation...............9-79 12.2.6.2 Set Up PC................9-79 12.2.6.3 Install the 4-Port Digital Logging Unit ........9-80 12.2.6.4 Install the NEC IP/Digital BackOffice Software .......9-81 12.2.7 Configure Ports ................9-88 System Hardware Manual...
  • Page 34 12.3.1.3 Screen Resolution ..............9-96 12.3.1.4 Is Microsoft.Net Framework 2.0 Installed? ......9-96 12.4 NEC IP/Digital Player Installation..........9-97 12.4.1 Installing the NEC IP/Digital Player ..........9-97 12.5 NEC IP/Digital Manager Installation..........9-103 12.5.1 Installing the NEC IP/Digital Manager ........9-105 12.5.2 Install Call Manager License............9-110 12.5.2.1 License Manager System .............9-110...
  • Page 35 13.7.3 IP6-L Adapter Installation and Configuration ......9-158 13.7.3.1 Log into IP6-L Adapter Configuration Screen .......9-158 13.7.3.2 Security .................9-159 Section 14 NEC DT700/DT800 Wireless (Wi-Fi) Adapter ........9-159 14.1 Wireless Adapter (WFA-Z) ............9-159 14.1.1 NEC DT700/DT800 Wireless (Wi-Fi) Adapter Switch Settings ..................
  • Page 36 Issue 10.0 14.1.2 Installing the NEC DT700/DT800 Wireless (Wi-Fi) Adapter ..9-160 14.1.3 Wi-Fi Adapter Connection............9-162 14.2 LED Indicators................9-163 14.3 Configuring the Wi-Fi Adapter............. 9-163 14.3.1 Web GUI..................9-164 14.3.1.1 Default Configuration ............9-164 14.3.1.2 Logging into the Adapter............9-164 14.3.1.3 Logout Page .................9-165...
  • Page 37 Issue 10.0 17.4 Before Installing the IP Video Doorphone ........9-188 17.4.1 Precautionary Information............9-188 17.4.2 Installation Information............... 9-188 17.4.3 General Precautions ..............9-191 17.4.4 Site Requirements ..............9-191 17.4.5 Powering On the IP Video Doorphone........9-192 17.5 Installation ................... 9-192 17.5.1 Connect a Door Unlock Device to the IP Video Doorphone ..
  • Page 38 Issue 10.0 Table of Contents...

  • Page 39: Table Of Contents

    LIST OF FIGURES Chapter 1 Introduction to SV9100 Figure 1-1 Simplified SV9100 System (9.5” Chassis) Connectivity ..........1-2 Figure 1-2 Simplified SV9100 System (9.5” Base and Expansion) Connectivity ......1-3 Figure 1-3 Simplified SV9100 System (19”) Connectivity ...............1-3 Chapter 2 SV9100 System Specifications Figure 2-1 SV9100 System Block Diagram ..................2-4 Figure 2-2...
  • Page 40 Issue 10.0 Figure 3-19 GPZ-BS11 Installed (Cover Closed) ................3-16 Figure 3-20 19” Expansion Chassis Interface Units ............... 3-17 Figure 3-21 System Expansion Cabling ..................3-18 Figure 3-22 Chassis Grounding Lug ....................3-19 Figure 3-23 19” Chassis Grounding Lug (Multiple-Chassis) ............3-20 Figure 3-24 Install the AC Power Cord ...................
  • Page 41 Issue 10.0 Figure 3-53 Wall Mount Positioning for 9.5” Base/Expansion Chassis ...........3-46 Figure 3-54 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (9.5” Chassis) ..............3-47 Figure 3-55 Anchor Bolt from Wall (9.5” Chassis) ................3-48 Figure 3-56 Align Bracket on Wall (9.5” Chassis) ................3-48 Figure 3-57 Install Upper Bracket (9.5”...
  • Page 42 Issue 10.0 Figure 3-87 Install Rubber Feet for Multiple Chassis ..............3-71 Figure 3-88 Install Metal Brackets with Screws ................3-71 Figure 3-89 Assemble Stand Mount with Screws ................3-72 Figure 3-90 Secure CHS2UG Chassis to CHS2UG STAND KIT (K) with Screws ......3-73 Figure 3-91 Secure Stand Mount to Floor with Screws ..............
  • Page 43 Issue 10.0 Figure 3-121 Removing Battery Tray Cover ..................3-95 Figure 3-122 Removing Battery Tray Bracket ...................3-96 Figure 3-123 Battery Cable Connection Guide .................3-96 Figure 3-124 Installing Battery Connection Cable ................3-97 Figure 3-125 Connecting Battery Cables ..................3-98 Figure 3-126 Installing Cover Battery ....................3-98 Figure 3-127 Removing Fan Access Panel ..................3-99 Figure 3-128...
  • Page 44 Issue 10.0 Chapter 4 Installing the SV9100 Blades Figure 4-1 19” Chassis CPU and Expansion Slot Locations ............4-2 Figure 4-2 9.5” Base and Expansion Chassis CPU Location ............4-3 Figure 4-3 Inserting Blades in the 19” Chassis ................4-5 Figure 4-4 Inserting Blades in the 9.5”...
  • Page 45 Issue 10.0 Figure 4-34 Control Signal Connection ...................4-97 Figure 4-35 GCD-VM00 Blade ......................4-98 Figure 4-36 Install the CR-2032 Battery ..................4-99 Figure 4-37 Install the SO-DIMM Memory ..................4-100 Figure 4-38 Install the Compact Flash Drive .................4-100 Figure 4-39 Straight RJ-11 Pin Out ....................4-102 Figure 4-40 GCD-PVAA Blade ......................4-104 Figure 4-41...
  • Page 46 Issue 10.0 Figure 5-18 ITL-6DE-1 TEL ......................5-34 Figure 5-19 ITL-8LDE-1 TEL ......................5-35 Figure 5-20 ITL-8LD-1 TEL ......................5-36 Figure 5-21 ITL-12D-1 TEL ......................5-37 Figure 5-22 ITL-12CG-3 TEL ......................5-38 Figure 5-23 ITL-12DG-3 TEL ......................5-39 Figure 5-24 ITL-12PA-1 TEL ......................
  • Page 47 Issue 10.0 Figure 5-52 Line Cord Groove (DT500) ..................5-64 Figure 5-53 Line Cord Groove Back of Terminal (DT500) ..............5-65 Figure 5-54 Remove Panel and Designation Label .................5-65 Figure 5-55 Replace Panel and Designation Label .................5-66 Figure 5-56 IP Terminal Connector Locations .................5-67 Figure 5-57 Typical Network IP Connection ..................5-68 Figure 5-58...
  • Page 48 Issue 10.0 Figure 5-86 Removing the Multiline Terminal ................. 5-84 Figure 5-87 Wall Mounting Base on Wall Plate ................5-84 Figure 5-88 Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal ................. 5-85 Figure 5-89 IP4WW-Wall Mount Unit Spacing Guide ..............5-86 Figure 5-90 Installing the Screws ....................5-87 Figure 5-91 Removing the Hanger Hook ..................
  • Page 49 Issue 10.0 Figure 5-120 Removing the Line Key Placeholder ................5-108 Figure 5-121 Aligning the 12LK-L KIT .....................5-109 Figure 5-122 Installing the 12LK-L KIT ....................5-109 Figure 5-123 Installing the DESI Sheet ...................5-110 Figure 5-124 Installing the Line Key Panel ..................5-110 Figure 5-125 Attaching Directory Card to Directory Card Holder ............5-113 Figure 5-126 Attaching Directory Card Holder to the Multiline Terminal .........5-114...
  • Page 50 Issue 10.0 Figure 5-154 Install Telephone Connection Cable ................. 5-136 Figure 5-155 DSS to IP Multiline Connection ................. 5-137 Figure 5-156 Installing the DSS Console Support Bracket ............. 5-138 Figure 5-157 Installing the AC Adapter ................... 5-139 Figure 5-158 Installing the DSS Console LINE Connection ............5-139 Figure 5-159 Installing the Designation Label ................
  • Page 51 Issue 10.0 Figure 5-188 Attach 60 DSS WM-K UNIT Using Wall Plate ............5-157 Figure 5-189 Attach Modular Rosette .....................5-157 Figure 5-190 Connect Line Cord .....................5-158 Figure 5-191 Connect Line Cord to DSS Console ................5-158 Figure 5-192 Attach DSS Console to 60 DSS WM-K UNIT ............5-159 Figure 5-193 ITL / DTL PTM Handset .....................5-160 Figure 5-194...
  • Page 52 Issue 10.0 Figure 6-8 Placing the AC Adapter Cord Inside the Wall Mount Stand .......... 6-6 Figure 6-9 Placing the Base Unit on the Posts of the Wall Plate ............ 6-7 Figure 6-10 Plugging the AC Adapter into the AC Wall Outlet ............6-7 Figure 6-11 Inserting Screws into the Wall for Wall Mounting the Telephone ........
  • Page 53 USB Wireless Headset (CS50-USB) ..............6-51 Figure 6-71 Cordless Headset (MX250) ..................6-53 Figure 6-72 Cordless Headset (M175) ....................6-54 Figure 6-73 NEC Polaris Supraplus ....................6-54 Figure 6-74 NEC Polaris Mirage .....................6-55 Figure 6-75 NEC Polaris TriStar ......................6-55 SV9100 System Hardware Manual xliii...
  • Page 54 ML440 – Handset Battery Installation ................. 7-24 Figure 7-25 ML440 – Insert Handset into Charger ................. 7-25 Chapter 8 Installing SV9100 Conference Solutions Figure 8-1 NEC SIP Conference Installation .................. 8-2 Figure 8-2 Install Additional NEC SIP Conference Units ..............8-2 xliv List of Figures...
  • Page 55 Issue 10.0 Chapter 9 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment Figure 9-1 PGD(2)-U10 ADP ......................9-2 Figure 9-2 PGDAD(PGD2) ......................9-2 Figure 9-3 Connection Between Port and Dead Port Numbers ............9-3 Figure 9-4 Remove Cover from PGD(2)-U10 ADP .................9-4 Figure 9-5 Remove Plastic Cover from Cable Hole ................9-4 Figure 9-6 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Jumper Settings ................9-5 Figure 9-7...
  • Page 56 Figure 9-58 Manage Calls at Completion ..................9-73 Figure 9-59 File Management Tab ....................9-74 Figure 9-60 NEC Options for Additional Adjustments ..............9-74 Figure 9-61 Customizing Application to Meet Requirements ............9-75 Figure 9-62 Digital Call Logger Connection ..................9-76 Figure 9-63 Digital Logging Unit Connection Configuration ............
  • Page 57 USB Key Error – Call Manager ..................9-111 term Figure 9-94 VSR Call Manager – Select USB Dongle ............9-112 Figure 9-95 NEC IP/VSR Reporter Pro ..................9-113 Figure 9-96 VSR Reporter Pro ......................9-114 term Figure 9-97 VSR Reporter Pro – Welcome Screen .............9-115...
  • Page 58 In-Line Power Adapter ....................9-122 Figure 9-105 In-Line Power Adapter Switch Settings ..............9-123 Figure 9-106 NEC Terminal Connection to an IEEE 802.3af PoE Switch ........9-124 Figure 9-107 ADA-L UNIT ......................9-125 Figure 9-108 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support ................9-127 Figure 9-109 Bottom Option Interface Knockout ................
  • Page 59 Issue 10.0 Figure 9-136 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support ................9-146 Figure 9-137 Remove Legs From Multiline Terminal ..............9-146 Figure 9-138 Attach the LAN Cable ....................9-147 Figure 9-139 Attach the DC Power Cable ..................9-147 Figure 9-140 Align Bracket with Terminal ..................9-148 Figure 9-141 Pass Cabling Through Bracket ..................9-148 Figure 9-142...
  • Page 60 Issue 10.0 Figure 9-170 Factory Default Settings .................... 9-170 Figure 9-171 Manual Reset ......................9-170 Figure 9-172 Wi-Fi Config Tab ....................... 9-171 Figure 9-173 Removable Drives Not Detected ................9-172 Figure 9-174 Local IP Config Tab ....................9-174 Figure 9-175 Power Failure Connector (CN3) Shown on GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A Blade .

  • Page 61: List Of Tables

    LIST OF TABLES Regulatory Table R-1 Battery Types and Quantities for Chassis and Blades ..........R-16 Chapter 1 Introduction to SV9100 Table 1-1 Chassis Equipment List ....................1-5 Table 1-2 Chassis Installation Equipment List ................1-5 Table 1-3 Battery Mount Equipment List ..................1-6 Table 1-4 Blade Equipment List ....................1-6 Table 1-5...
  • Page 62 Daughter Board Combinations ................. 2-19 Table 2-9 License Information ....................2-20 Table 2-10 NEC External Solutions .................... 2-25 Table 2-11 Blade Power Factor Chart ..................2-26 Table 2-12 Maximum Number of Packages Installed – CHS2UG ..........2-26 Table 2-13 Maximum Number of Packages Installed – CHS2UG B/CHS2UG E ....... 2-27 Table 2-14 Terminal Power Factor .....................
  • Page 63 Issue 10.0 Chapter 3 Installing the SV9100 Chassis Table 3-1 Power Failure Transfer Connections ................3-4 Table 3-2 Power Failure Transfer Connections (Fax CO) ............3-5 Table 3-3 GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20/GPZ-BS11 Connector Pin-Out ..........3-10 Table 3-4 GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20/GPZ-BS11 Connector Pin-Out ..........3-30 Table 3-5 CHSG LARGE BATT BOX Capacity ................
  • Page 64 Issue 10.0 Table 4-22 GPZ-4LCA/GPZ-8LCE/ RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs ........4-57 Table 4-23 GCD-4LCF/GCD-8LCF LED Indications ..............4-60 Table 4-24 GCD-4LCF/GCD-8LCF RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs ........4-61 Table 4-25 GPZ-4LCF/GPZ-8LCF/ RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs ........4-64 Table 4-26 GCD-LTA LED Indications ..................4-67 Table 4-27 GCD-LTA RJ11 Cable Connector Pin-Outs .............
  • Page 65 Issue 10.0 Table 4-51 MDF Cable Connections (Station) ................4-129 Table 4-52 MDF Cable Connections (Trunk) ................4-131 Chapter 5 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones Table 5-1 Terminal Category Reference Chart ................5-1 Table 5-2 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT300/DT700) ..........
  • Page 66 Issue 10.0 Chapter 6 Installing SV9100 Cordless Telephones Table 6-1 Firmware Compatibility Matrix .................. 6-33 Table 6-2 BCH Charging LEDs ....................6-34 Chapter 7 Installing SV9100 Wireless Telephones Table 7-1 G955 Icon Line Icons ....................7-4 Table 7-2 G955 Bluetooth Headset Status Icons ............... 7-5 Table 7-3 G955 Battery Charge Status Icons ................
  • Page 67 Issue 10.0 Table 9-10 External Server – Available Ports ................9-181 Table 9-11 IP Video Doorphone Cable Terminals ..............9-193 Table 9-12 Doorphone Specifications (Relay) ................9-193 Table 9-13 IP Video Doorphone Specifications ................ 9-194 SV9100 System Hardware Manual lvii...
  • Page 68 Issue 10.0 lviii List of Tables...

  • Page 69: Radio Frequency Interference

    Regulatory SAFETY INFORMATION This equipment has been certified by Canadian Standards Association and found to comply with all applicable requirements of North America: CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 0-M91 (R2001) - General Requirements - Canadian Electrical Code, Part II  CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60950-1-07, 2nd Ed. - Information Technology Equipment - Safety - Part 1: ...
  • Page 70 Issue 10.0 CANADA - TELEPHONE TERMINAL APPARATUS Notice: This equipment meets the applicable Innovation, Science and Economic Development Canada (ISED) Terminal Equipment Technical Specifications. This is confirmed by the registration number. The abbreviation, IC, before the registration number signifies that registration was performed based on a Declaration of Conformity indicating that ISED technical specifications were met.
  • Page 71 Incorrect use of the equipment may limit the system performance or cause the system to fail. The telephone system can only be used in NEC-designated countries. If a system-down, malfunction, defect or external factor such as an electrical failure indirectly causes a loss of profit, the company (or affiliates) will not be held responsible.

  • Page 72: Safety Considerations

    It might cause a fire, an electrical shock or a system failure. Be sure to use cables designated by NEC or cables attached to the equipment. If cables are not designated particularly, choose cables with considering safety and transmission performance carefully.
  • Page 73 Be careful when using any peripheral equipment’s Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). If the liquid leaks, it can be harmful to the user and to the system. Before connecting any non-NEC, customer-provided equipment, check with the supplier to ensure that the equipment is compatible. If the supplier cannot confirm the compatibility, do not connect the equipment.
  • Page 74 Issue 10.0 WARNING Do not place any object on the system or the main power source. If the object falls, it might cause personal injury or damage to the equipment. When removing a plug from an outlet, be sure to grip the plug, not the cord. Gripping the cord to remove the plug could cause a fire or an electrical shock to occur.
  • Page 75 Issue 10.0 WARNING Observe the following precautions when using any optional batteries: The system’s emergency back-up battery may be a rechargeable lead battery. Check  the emergency battery for an electrical failure. Battery acid (electrolyte) is extremely harmful to human skin and eyes. If battery acid ...
  • Page 76 Issue 10.0 WARNING Do not place any equipment in the following environments: Locations that are exposed to direct sunlight  Locations where the moisture level exceeds the allowed level  Locations where the equipment might be exposed to water, oil, or chemicals ...

  • Page 77: Fire Extinguisher

    Issue 10.0 INSTALLATION ENVIRONMENT Consider the following items before installation. Stability WARNING Install the system with anchor bolts to prevent constant movement or vibration, such as from a nearby motor or automatic door, and to resist catastrophic movement from natural disasters, such as an earthquake.

  • Page 78: Lightning Strikes

    Issue 10.0 Air Conditioning Facilities WARNING The system and the air conditioning system must be installed separately and have separate power sources. To prevent an electromagnetic arc from causing noise, attach a surge-limiting capacitor and resistor on the air conditioner’s electromagnetic switch’s coil. It might be necessary to adjust the ventilation so the air conditioning is equally effective throughout the equipment room.
  • Page 79 Issue 10.0 Disposables and Periodic-replacement Parts CAUTION Many parts, such as batteries, backup batteries, fuses and displays need to be replaced on a periodic basis. In the event of sudden traffic, a part that is past due for replacement might lead to a system failure and damage to the system.
  • Page 80 Issue 10.0 TELEPHONE/SERVICE PROVIDER COMPANY NOTIFICATION Before connecting this telephone system to the telephone network, the following information must be provided to the telephone company: Your telephone number.  FCC registration number:  When the SV9100 system is to be installed as a Key Function system (no dial access to Trunk ...
  • Page 81 FCC, should you feel it is necessary. REPAIR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS If equipment malfunctions, all repairs must be performed by an authorized agent of NEC Corporation of America. The user requiring service is responsible for reporting the need for service to an NEC Corporation of America authorized agent or to NEC Corporation of America.

  • Page 82: Toll Restriction And Least Cost Routing Equipment

    TOLL RESTRICTION AND LEAST COST ROUTING EQUIPMENT The software contained in the UNIVERGE SV9100 to allow user access to the network must be  upgraded to recognize newly established network area codes and exchange codes as they are placed into service.

  • Page 83: Equal Access Requirements

    1990. HEARING AID COMPATIBILITY NEC Multiline Terminals and NEC Single Line Telephones that are provided for this system are hearing aid compatible. The manufacturer of other Single Line Telephones for use with the system must provide notice of hearing aid compatibility to comply with FCC rules that now prohibit the use of non-hearing aid compatible telephones.

  • Page 84: Battery Disposal

    Issue 10.0 BATTERY DISPOSAL The UNIVERGE SV9100 system includes the batteries listed below. When disposing of these batteries, Chassis, and/or Blades, you must comply with applicable federal and state regulations regarding proper disposal procedures. Table R-1 Battery Types and Quantities for Chassis and Blades...

  • Page 85: European Union Information

    Issue 10.0 PRODUCT PACKAGE LABELING CONTAINS NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY. BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE. Ni-Cd CONTAINS SEALED LEAD BATTERY. BATTERY MUST BE RECYCLED. MUST NOT BE DISPOSED OF IN MUNICIPAL WASTE. CONTAINS NICKEL-METAL HYDRIDE BATTERY.
  • Page 86 To take advantage of all features of this system and the connected equipment, the country or network specific features should match the supported features of the system. For an overview of the supported features, refer to the documentation that comes with this system, or contact your local NEC representative.

  • Page 87: Product Disposal Information

    This product uses Lithium batteries. Do not use any other type. For an overview of the location of batteries used in these systems, the battery replacement or removal instructions, please refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 System Hardware Manual. SV9100 System Hardware Manual...
  • Page 88 Issue 10.0 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK R-20...

  • Page 89: Section 1 General Information

    UNIVERGE ® SV9100 Chapter 1 Introduction to SV9100 ECTION ENERAL NFORMATION The SV9100 is a full-featured IP based communications system providing a rich set of existing system features, with pure Voice over IP (VoIP) communications, across corporate Local and Wide Area Networks (LAN and WAN). The IP Multiline Terminals provide a converged infrastructure at the desktop, with a 10Base-T/100Base-TX connection to the LAN and built-in hub for a PC connection to the telephone itself.

  • Page 90: Figure 1-1 Simplified Sv9100 System (9.5" Chassis) Connectivity

    Issue 10.0 Communications between legacy stations/trunks and IP stations/IP networks are made using a VoIP daughter board, which converts packet-based voice data to TDM-based voice data, and vice versa. Both peer-to-peer connections and TDM-based connections are controlled by the CPU blade. The CPU incorporates a built-in Device Registration Server (DRS) and a single interface point of IP connection to IP telephone, PCPro and OAI / ACD servers.

  • Page 91: Figure 1-2 Simplified Sv9100 System (9.5" Base And Expansion) Connectivity

    Issue 10.0 Figure 1-2 Simplified SV9100 System (9.5” Base and Expansion) Connectivity SV9100 9.5” Base Expansion Chassis Figure 1-3 Simplified SV9100 System (19”) Connectivity SV9100 19” Expanded System SV9100 System Hardware Manual...
  • Page 92 Issue 10.0 Highlights of the UNIVERGE SV9100 are as follows: Pure IP System Capable TDM Configuration  The SV9100 supports both pure IP switching (peer-to-peer connections) and Time Division Switching. The pure IP switching is provided for communications between IP Multiline Terminals and for CCIS/Remote Unit connections with other SV8100/SV8300/SV7000/SV9100.

  • Page 93: Section 2 Equipment

    Issue 10.0 Universal Blade Slot (9.5” Base Chassis)  A 9.5” Base (CHS2UG B) chassis is used for legacy line/trunk blades. The 9.5” chassis provides three universal slots. Also, the universal slots can be used for special application blades without complicated limitation. This makes for easy quotation and installation.

  • Page 94: Table 1-3 Battery Mount Equipment List

    Issue 10.0 Table 1-2 Chassis Installation Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Equipment Description CHS2UG RACK MOUNT KIT Rack Mount for CHS2UG Chassis CHS1UG/2UG WALL MOUNT KIT Wall Mount Set for CHS2UG Chassis CHS2UG Stand Kit (K) Stand Mount Kit for CHS2UG Chassis CHS2UG STAND KIT (EXT) Expansion Plate for Stand Mount Kit for CHS2UG Chassis, 2 sets...
  • Page 95 Issue 10.0 Table 1-4 Blade Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Abbreviations Equipment Description GCD-4COTB 4-port Analog Trunk Interface. Name and location is: GCD-4COTB: North America GCD-4COTB-A 4-port Analog Trunk Interface. Name and location is: GCD-4COTB-A: North America GPZ-4COTF COTDB 4-port Analog Trunk Interface on GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A and GCD-LTA.

  • Page 96: Chapter 1 Introduction To Sv9100

    Issue 10.0 Table 1-4 Blade Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Abbreviations Equipment Description SD-B1 4G-APP-CF 4GB InMail SD Card for CP10 SD-A2 2G-APP-CF 2GB InMail SD Card for CP20 SD-B2 8G-APP-CF 8GB InMail SD Card for CP20 GCD-RGA Application Gateway – Router and Conference GCD-4LC 4-port Single Line Telephone Interface GCD-8LC...

  • Page 97: Table 1-7 Digital Multiline Terminal (Dt400 Series) Equipment List

    Issue 10.0 Table 1-6 Digital Multiline Terminal (DT300 Series) Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Equipment Description DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL Economy Digital 6-button Display Telephone DTL-12E-1 (BK) TEL Economy Digital 12-button Telephone (No-Display) DTL-12D-1 (BK) TEL Value Digital 12-button Display Telephone DTL-12D-1 (WH) TEL DTL-24D-1 (BK) TEL Value Digital 24-button Display Telephone...

  • Page 98: Table 1-8 Digital Multiline Terminal (Dt500 Series) Equipment List

    Issue 10.0 Table 1-7 Digital Multiline Terminal (DT400 Series) Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Equipment Description 16LK-Z (BK) UNIT 16-button Line Key Unit 16LK-Z (WH) UNIT Table 1-8 Digital Multiline Terminal (DT500 Series) Equipment List Equipment Name Equipment Description DTK-12D-1 (BK) TEL Digital 12-button Display Telephone DTK-12D-1 (WH) TEL DTK-24D-1 (BK) TEL...

  • Page 99: Table 1-10 Ip Multiline Terminal (Dt800 Series) Equipment List

    Issue 10.0 Table 1-10 IP Multiline Terminal (DT800 Series) Equipment List Equipment Name Equipment Description ITY-6D-1 (BK) TEL Entry IP 6-button Display Telephone ITY-8LDX-1 (BK) TEL Entry IP 8-button Display Telephone (Self-Labeling) ITY-8LCGX-1P (BK) TEL Entry IP 8-button Color Display Telephone (Self-Labeling) ITZ-8LD-3 (BK) TEL Economy IP 8-button Line Key Display Telephone (Self-Labeling) ITZ-12D-3 (BK) TEL...

  • Page 100: Ada-L Unit

    Issue 10.0 Table 1-12 Single Line Telephones Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Equipment Description AT-55 (BK) TEL Caller-ID Analog Terminal with feature keys such as Speaker, AT-55 (WH) TEL Hold, One touch, Redial, Flash/Pause, PBX Dial/Set, Search and Mute. (Except for China and Malaysia) Table 1-13 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List Equipment Name Equipment Description...
  • Page 101 Issue 10.0 Table 1-13 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Equipment Description DESI ITL/DTL-SIDE-LCDS (25 PKG) DESI Sheet for Sophisticated Telephone LCD (Left and Right Part Sheet, 25 Package) DESI ITL/DTL DIR CARD Directory Card DESI ITL/DTL-24D (25 PKG) DESI Sheet for Value 24-button Display Telephone (2 Part Sheet, 25 Package) Panel (Red-Base)-L UNIT...
  • Page 102 Issue 10.0 Table 1-13 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Equipment Description 12LKSoft-L (BK) SET 12-button Kit without Softkey 12LKSoft-L (WH) SET 12LK(STD)-L (BK) SET 12-button on 12D Terminal (Line #13~24) 12LK(STD)-L (WH) SET TKPANEL(STD)-L (BK) UNIT 10-Key Panel TKPANEL(STD)-L (WH) UNIT Cradle (STD)-L(BK) Cradle...
  • Page 103 Issue 10.0 Table 1-13 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Equipment Description LKPANEL(24BTN)-L Color LK panel (24button) for Value (Metallic Blue) (M-Blue) UNIT 1 set consists 10 of panels LKPANEL(24BTN)-L Color LK panel (24button) for Value (GunMetallic) (GUNMETA) UNIT 1 set consists 10 of panels LKPANEL(24BTN)-L Color LK panel (24button) for Value (Lime Green Metallic)
  • Page 104 Issue 10.0 Table 1-13 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Equipment Description WFA-Z Adapter Wireless adapter (Wi-Fi) for DT700 series BS (F)-L (BK) KIT French Keypad BS (F)-L (WH) KIT BS (S)-L (BK) KIT Spanish Keypad BS (S)-L (WH) KIT BS (ICON)-L (BK) KIT ICON Support Keypad BS (ICON)-L (WH) KIT...

  • Page 105: Table 1-14 Dt400/Dt800 Series Optional Equipment List

    Issue 10.0 Table 1-13 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Equipment Description G955 SIP DECT Handset SIP DECT wireless handset 4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit Digital Call Logging Unit 1-Port Digital Call Logging Unit Digital Call Logging Unit 16-Port Digital Call Logging Unit Digital Call Logging Unit I766 SIP DECT Handset...

  • Page 106: Chapter 1 Introduction To Sv9100

    Issue 10.0 Table 1-15 DT500/DT900 Series Optional Equipment List (Continued) Equipment Name Equipment Description WM-L UNIT Wall Mount Unit for DT900 series IP Multiline Terminals DSS WM-K UNIT Wall Mount Unit for DT500 series Digital Multiline Terminals and DSS console BS (F)-K French keypad BS (S)-K...

  • Page 107: Figure 2-1 Sv9100 System Block Diagram

    UNIVERGE ® SV9100 Chapter 2 SV9100 System Specifications ECTION ENERAL NFORMATION This chapter provides detailed specifications for the SV9100 system technician. The technician should review this information carefully before installing the system. ECTION YSTEM LOCK IAGRAM Figure 2-1 SV9100 System Block Diagram shows the Blades that can be installed in the chassis and the number of channels supported when the Blade is installed.
  • Page 108 Issue 10.0 Table 2-1 List of Abbreviations (Continued) Abbreviation Description Direct Inward Dialing DIOP DID/OPX Blade Digital Multiline Terminal Interface Blade DLCB Expansion Digital Multiline Terminal Interface Blade on DLC Device Registration Server (on CPU) Direct Station Selection Console Digital Trunk Interface Digital Tone Generator (on CPU) ETHERNET Ethernet Port (on CPU)
  • Page 109 Issue 10.0 Table 2-1 List of Abbreviations (Continued) Abbreviation Description Primary Rate Interface Blade Personal Station PSTN Adapter (analog) Packet Voice Application Router Blade SD card SERIAL Serial Port (on CPU) Single Line Telephone SMDR Station Message Detail Recording TDSW Time Division Switch (on CPU) Universal Serial Bus (on CPU) GCD-VM00...
  • Page 110 Issue 10.0 Figure 2-1 SV9100 System Block Diagram SV9100 System Specifications...

  • Page 111: Section 3 Maximum

    Issue 10.0 ECTION AXIMUM YSTEM APACITIES Trunk/Port/Channel Capacities The CHS2UG is a compact 19” chassis that has six universal slots, one expansion slot and one MPS7101 (power supply unit). When the GCD-CP10/GCD-CP20 is installed in the first CHS2UG, it is called the Controlling Chassis. Additional chassis, called Expansion Chassis, can be installed to increase the capacity of the system to meet the customer’s business needs.
  • Page 112 Issue 10.0 Table 2-2 SV9100 Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels (CHS2UG Chassis) (Continued) CHS2UG Chassis System Number of: Maximum (6 Slots) (12 Slots) (18 Slots) (24 Slots) Analog Trunks (COT) Total 400 PRI/T1 (1.5M) PRI/E1 (2M) IP Trunk (SIP) 144 *2 Tone Receivers (GCD-CP10) 153 *3 Tone Receivers (GCD-CP20)
  • Page 113 Issue 10.0 Figure 2-2 19” Controlling and Expansion Chassis 19” - 6 Slots 9.5” - 3 Slots 19” x 3 - 18 Slots 19” x 4 - 24 Slots IP Connection SV9100 System Hardware Manual...
  • Page 114 Issue 10.0 There are two 9.5” chassis, the Base and Expansion . The base unit has three universal slots, one expansion slot and one MPS7101 (power supply unit). The expansion unit has three universal slots, no expansion slot, and no power supply unit.

  • Page 115: Table 2-3 Sv9100 Maximum System Capacities - Trunks/Ports/Channels (Chs2Ug B And Chs2Ug E Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 The maximum slot and channel capacities for the CHS2UG B and CHS2UG E chassis are listed in Table 2-3 SV9100 Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/ Ports/Channels (CHS2UG B and CHS2UG E chassis). Table 2-3 SV9100 Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels (CHS2UG B and CHS2UG E chassis) CHS2UG B CHS2UG B + CHS2UG E System...
  • Page 116 Issue 10.0 Table 2-3 SV9100 Maximum System Capacities – Trunks/Ports/Channels (CHS2UG B and CHS2UG E chassis) CHS2UG B CHS2UG B + CHS2UG E System Number of: Maximum (CPU + 2 (6 Slots) (12 Slots) (18 Slots) (24 Slots) Slots)  1 = For-law countries 104 timeslots per chassis are assigned the G.711 PCM communications (e.g., voice communications) and 7 timeslots per chassis are assigned for the Data communications (e.g., HDLC over ISDN).

  • Page 117: (Chs2Ug Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 System Chassis Capacities Table 2-4 Maximum System Capacities – CHS2UG Chassis shows the maximum number of chassis and related equipment that can be installed in a system. Table 2-4 Maximum System Capacities – CHS2UG Chassis CHS2UG CHS2UG CHS2UG Hardware Chassis Chassis...

  • Page 118: Table 2-5 Maximum System Capacities - Chs2Ug B And Chs2Ug E Chassis

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-5 Maximum System Capacities – CHS2UG B and CHS2UG E Chassis shows the maximum number of chassis and related equipment that can be installed in a 9.5” Base and Expansion system. Table 2-5 Maximum System Capacities – CHS2UG B and CHS2UG E Chassis CHS2UG B CHS2UG B CHS2UG B...

  • Page 119: Blade Capacities

    Issue 10.0 Blade Capacities This is determined by the maximum blade configuration allowed. When installing single line sets, DISA, or tie lines, CPU circuits must be allocated for DTMF receivers. To install single line sets with CO/PBX line access, or when installing immediate-start tie lines, CPU circuits must be allocated for dial tone detection.
  • Page 120 Issue 10.0 Table 2-6 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG Chassis (Continued) CHS2UG CHS2UG CHS2UG Hardware Chassis Chassis Chassis Networked with CPU without CPU Chassis Comments (NetLink) Number of Slot(s) for Interface 5 Slots 6 Slots 23 Slots Package GCD-8LCF (8 Single Line Telephone Interface) GPZ-4LCF...

  • Page 121: Table 2-7 Sv9100 Maximum Blade Capacities - Chs2Ug B And Chs2Ug E Chassis

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-6 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG Chassis (Continued) CHS2UG CHS2UG CHS2UG Hardware Chassis Chassis Chassis Networked with CPU without CPU Chassis Comments (NetLink) Number of Slot(s) for Interface 5 Slots 6 Slots 23 Slots Package GCD-PVAA (CCIS Point-to-Multipoint) GCD-ETIA –...
  • Page 122 Issue 10.0 Table 2-7 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG B and CHS2UG E Chassis (Continued) CHS2UG B CHS2UG B CHS2UG B Hardware CHS2UG B CHS2UG E CHS2UG E Networked CHS2UG E without with CPU Chassis Comments with CPU (NetLink) Number of Slot(s) for 3 Slots 5 Slots...
  • Page 123 Issue 10.0 Table 2-7 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG B and CHS2UG E Chassis (Continued) CHS2UG B CHS2UG B CHS2UG B Hardware CHS2UG B CHS2UG E CHS2UG E Networked CHS2UG E without with CPU Chassis Comments with CPU (NetLink) Number of Slot(s) for 3 Slots 5 Slots...
  • Page 124 Issue 10.0 Table 2-7 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG B and CHS2UG E Chassis (Continued) CHS2UG B CHS2UG B CHS2UG B Hardware CHS2UG B CHS2UG E CHS2UG E Networked CHS2UG E without with CPU Chassis Comments with CPU (NetLink) Number of Slot(s) for 3 Slots 5 Slots...

  • Page 125: Table 2-8 Daughter Board Combinations

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-8 Daughter Board Combinations shows each blade and associated daughter board combinations. The daughter boards that can be mounted on specific blades are indicated by a checkmark. For example, the GCD-LTA can have a GPZ-2BRIA or the GPZ-4COTF GPZ-4COTF-A daughter board mounted.

  • Page 126: Section 4 Licensing

    Issue 10.0 ECTION ICENSING Table 2-9 License Information provides a list of the licensing available with the system. Table 2-9 License Information Feature Feature Name Item Name Min Max Note Code (WebPro/PCPro) This license number is determined according to number of secondary sites. For example, if you have one (1) Primary and three (3) Secondary sites networked;...
  • Page 127 Issue 10.0 Table 2-9 License Information (Continued) Feature Feature Name Item Name Min Max Note Code (WebPro/PCPro) 0418 SV9100 VERSION LIC (R8) Version R8 On/Off – 0419 SV9100 VERSION LIC (R9) Version R9 On/Off – 0420 SV9100 VERSION LIC (R10) Version R10 On/Off –...
  • Page 128 Issue 10.0 Table 2-9 License Information (Continued) Feature Feature Name Item Name Min Max Note Code (WebPro/PCPro) SV9100 INCONTROL CR PKG 2107 InControl Server On/Off – SV91/93/95 CA STATION PKG 3000 CA-Basic On/Off – LIC-20 SV91/93/95 CA STATION PKG 3001 CA-256 Station On/Off –...
  • Page 129 Issue 10.0 Table 2-9 License Information (Continued) Feature Feature Name Item Name Min Max Note Code (WebPro/PCPro) SV91/93/95 IP/DIGITAL 3214 VSR-Archive – ARCHIVER PORT-LIC 01 3300 SV91/93 E911 ESN Suite-LIC ESN Registry On/Off – SV91/93 E911On-Site Monitor- 3301 ESN Site Monitor 9999 –...
  • Page 130 Issue 10.0 Table 2-9 License Information (Continued) Feature Feature Name Item Name Min Max Note Code (WebPro/PCPro) This will support external CRM SV9100 UCS CRM 5310 UCS CRM Integration applications. Refer to the UC Suite INTEGRATION-LIC 01 Installation manual for further details. SV9100 MOBILE PRESENCE 5311 UCS Mobile Presence...

  • Page 131: Section 5 Nec External Solutions

    OWER ASED ALCULATOR HART For the Univerge SV9100 system, two types of power factors are designated: Blade Power Factor, and Terminal Power Factor. For a single chassis chart refer to Table 2- 11 Blade Power Factor Chart on page 2-26. For each chassis, the blade power factor for blades installed in that chassis must not exceed a sum total of seven.

  • Page 132: Table 2-11 Blade Power Factor Chart

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-11 Blade Power Factor Chart Blade Power Factor Total =<7 Item Power Factor GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 GCD-VM00 GCD-ETIA GCD-PVAA GPZ-IPLE GCD-SVR2 GCD-SVR3 GCD-RGA All Others Table 2-12 Maximum Number of Packages Installed – CHS2UG Maximum Number of Packages Installed Blade CHS2UG with CHS2UG...

  • Page 133: Table 2-13 Maximum Number Of Packages Installed - Chs2Ug B/Chs2Ug E

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-13 Maximum Number of Packages Installed – CHS2UG B/CHS2UG E Maximum Number of Packages Installed CHS2UG B CHS2UG B Blade CHS2UG B CHS2UG B (Power Factor) with CPU CHS2UG E CHS2UG E with CPU without CPU CHS2UG E GCD-ETIA (2) GCD-PVAA (1) ...
  • Page 134 Issue 10.0 Table 2-14 Terminal Power Factor (Continued) Terminal Power Factor CHS2UG Chassis with Fan = <80 CHS2UG B or CHS2UG E Chassis without Fan =<64 Item Power Factor DSS Console (DCZ-60-2/DCL-60-1-CONSOLE) (DCK-60-1 CONSOLE) Power Save Adapter (PSA-L UNIT) Line Key Unit (8LK-Z/16LK-Z/8LK-L/8LK-K UNIT) Digital Multiline Terminals Ancillary Device Adapter (ADA-L UNIT)

  • Page 135: Table 2-15 Ip Terminal Power Factor Chart - Dt700

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-14 Terminal Power Factor (Continued) Terminal Power Factor CHS2UG Chassis with Fan = <80 CHS2UG B or CHS2UG E Chassis without Fan =<64 Item Power Factor Paging Adapter (PGD(2)-U10 ADP) IP Video Doorphone (IP3NE-IPCDH) Table 2-15 IP Terminal Power Factor Chart – DT700 Label Indication IEEE802.3 Maximum Current Without Options...

  • Page 136: Table 2-16 Ip Terminal Power Factor Chart - Dt800

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-16 IP Terminal Power Factor Chart – DT800 Label Indication IEEE802.3 Maximum Current Without Options (Maximum Current with All Options) Terminal Class 48VDC 24VDC 48VDC 24VDC ITY-6D-1 TEL Class 1 75mA 3.6W – – 75mA 3.6W – –...

  • Page 137: Table 2-18 Ieee802.Af Class Specifications

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-18 IEEE802.af Class Specifications IEEE802.3af Minimum Maximum Class 4 – – Class 3 6.49W 12.95W Class 2 3.84W 6.49W Class 1 0.44W 3.84W Class 0 0.44W 12.95W SV9100 System Hardware Manual 2-31...

  • Page 138: Specifications

    Issue 10.0 ECTION YSTEM EQUIREMENTS AND PECIFICATIONS Cabling This section provides cabling requirements and specifications for various equipment used in the SV9100 system. Figure 2-3 Connecting the DLC Using Twisted 2-Pair Cable is a diagram of the chassis connected with each of the multiline terminals and single line telephones by a separate twisted 1-pair cable or 2-pair cable (only for multiline terminals).
  • Page 139 Issue 10.0 Table 2-19 Digital Multiline Terminals Cable Length (Continued) By Twisted 1-Pair Cable Terminal or Adapter (without AC Adapter) 24 AWG DTL-24D-1 TEL 1,969 ft (600m) DTL-32D-1 TEL 1,969 ft (600m) 1,969 ft (600m) DTZ-2E-3 TEL DTZ-6DE-3 TEL 1,969 ft (600m) DTZ-12D-3 TEL 1,969 ft (600m) 1,969 ft (600m)
  • Page 140 Issue 10.0 Table 2-20 IP Multiline Terminals Cable Length (Continued) Terminal or Adapter Ethernet Cable Cat 5e/Cat 6 Ethernet ITL-12DG-3 TEL 328.1 ft (100m) Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet ITL-12PA-3 TEL 328.1 ft (100m) Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet ITL-24D-1 TEL 328.1 ft (100 m) ITL-32D-1 TEL Cat 5/Cat 6 Ethernet 328.1 ft (100m)

  • Page 141: Table 2-22 Cable Connection Between The Odt/Did System

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-21 Cable Connection Between Analog Port and Single Line Equipment (Continued) Connected Maximum Feet from Connected Equipment Cable Equipment to Telephone 600 ohms (Including the SLT) 3,281 ft (1,000m) with 26 AWG LCA/LCF/LCG Twisted Pair 4,920 ft (1,500m) with 24 AWG 8,202 ft (2,500m) with 22 AWG 1,500 ohms or less (Including the SLT) 13,123 ft (4,000m) with 26 AWG...

  • Page 142: Power Requirements

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-23 Cabling Requirements Connected Equipment Cable ITK/ITY/ITZ/ITL Cabling Cat 5 Straight Data Network Cable – 328.1 ft (100m) maximum distance IP Video Doorphone Maximum 100m (by LAN cable) Power Requirements A dedicated 100VAC/ 50Hz/60Hz circuit located 120VAC/220VAC/230 – 240VAC within seven feet of the chassis is required.

  • Page 143: Table 2-24 Power Supply Specifications

    Issue 10.0 7.2.1 Power Supply Specifications Table 2-24 Power Supply Specifications 110VAC 220VAC 230-240VAC Power Requirements 110VAC@15A 220VAC@15A 230-240VAC@15A Controlling/Base Controlling/Base Controlling/Base Chassis Chassis Chassis Power Consumption Base Chassis = Base Chassis = Base Chassis = 276VA 259VA 262VA (1.15Ax240V) 4 4 Chassis total = 4 Chassis total = Chassis total =...

  • Page 144: Power Supply Consumption

    Issue 10.0 7.2.2 Power Supply Consumption Table 2-25 Chassis Power Consumption provides power consumption information for the SV9100 chassis. Table 2-25 Chassis Power Consumption Maximum Watts Used Watts Used Chassis Voltage (Idle) (Maximum) Current 110VAC 2.35A Basic Chassis – GCD-CP10 or 220VAC 1.19A GCD-CP20 Chassis...

  • Page 145: Environmental Conditions

    Issue 10.0 Environmental Conditions The equipment operating temperature and humidity conditions are provided in this section. Recommended long term environmental conditions are also provided. 7.3.1 Temperature and Humidity Chassis, Telephones, BCH, BHA, 16LK, Console, ADA, APR Operating Temperature: +32°F ~ +104°F (0°C ~ 40°C) ...

  • Page 146: Outside Line Types

     Storage Humidity: 90% or less (non-condensing)  Outside Line Types The following outside lines can be used with the UNIVERGE SV9100 system. 2-wire, Loop Start or Ground Start Trunks  2-wire, 2-way DID Lines (Dial Pulse or DTMF) ...
  • Page 147 Issue 10.0 Table 2-26 Mean Time Between Failure (Continued) MTBF Category Description (Years) GPZ-BS11 71.1 GPZ-IPLE 59.1 GCD-8DLCA 22.89 GCD-16DLCA 16.61 GPZ-8DLCB 43.08 GCD-LTA 23.3 GCD-4LCA 33.8 GCD-8LCA 24.2 GPZ-4LCA 75.1 GPZ-8LCE 39.9 GCD-4COTB 31.2 GCD-4COTB-A 31.9 GPZ-4COTF 38.8 GPZ-4COTF-A 38.8 Blade (Cont.) GCD-2BRIA...
  • Page 148 Issue 10.0 Table 2-26 Mean Time Between Failure (Continued) MTBF Category Description (Years) ITK-6D-1 ITK-8LCX-1 IP Terminals ITK-8TCGX-1 ITK-12D-1 ITK-24CG-1 ITL-2E-1 ITL-6DE-1 ITL-8LDE-1 ITZ-12D-3 ITZ-24D-3 ITZ-8LD-3 IP Terminals ITZ-12DG-3 ITZ-24DG-3P ITZ-8LDG-3 ITZ-12CG-3 ITZ-24CG-3A ITL-12PA-1 ITL-320C-2 DCK-60-1 DSS Console DCZ-60-2 APR-L 89.62 Terminal Options ADA-L...

  • Page 149: Transmission, Network, And Control Specifications

    Network Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) allows transmission of data and voice simultaneously over one communications medium. The specifications that the UNIVERGE SV9100 system uses for switching, clock, data bus, and timeframe are shown below. TDM Switching: PCM (µ Law) ...

  • Page 150: Dialing Specifications

    Dual-Tone Multifrequency (DTMF) Address Signaling DTMF signaling includes push button or Touchtone dialing. When a key on a telephone is pushed, two tones (one high frequency and one low frequency) are provided. In the UNIVERGE SV9100 system, the following DTMF specifications are used. Frequencies ...
  • Page 151 Issue 10.0 Nominal High Group Frequencies (Hz) 1209 1336 1477 Nominal Low Group Frequencies (Hz) 7.7.3 External Equipment Connection Door Phone or TV Door Phone  External Speaker via amplifier  External music source for MOH and BGM  Tape recorder for voice recording via PGD(2)-U10 ADP ...

  • Page 152: Relay Contact

    7.7.10 Relay Contact All Relay Contact Ratings: 500 mA, 24Vdc  Battery Backup The UNIVERGE SV9100 system has battery backup functions for system backup and for memory backup. 7.8.1 System Backup (Optional) During a power failure, the CHS2UG can be backed up using the CHS2UG BATT MTG KIT for a backup time of 10 minutes or one of the CHSG LARGE BATT SETs for a backup time ranging from 45~180 minutes.
  • Page 153 Issue 10.0 Table 2-27 SV9100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued) Shipping Unit Height Width Depth Weight CHS2UG B 158.7 oz 4.57 in 8.47 in 14.53 in (4.5 kg) (116 mm) (215 mm) (369 mm) CHS2UG E 158.7 oz 4.57 in 8.47 in 14.53 in (4.5 kg) (116 mm)
  • Page 154 Issue 10.0 Table 2-27 SV9100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued) Shipping Unit Height Width Depth Weight GPZ-4COTF 3.53 oz 1.89 in 9.45 in 5.12 in (0.10 kg) (48 mm) (240 mm) (130 mm) GPZ-4COTF-A 6.70 oz 1.89 in 9.45 in 5.12 in (0.19 kg) (48 mm) (240 mm)
  • Page 155 Issue 10.0 Table 2-27 SV9100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued) Shipping Unit Height Width Depth Weight GCD-4DIOPA 7.73 oz 0.98 in 9.45 in 7.68 in (0.219 kg) (25 mm) (240 mm) (195 mm) GCD-SVR2 16.0 oz 0.98 in 5.71 in 7.68 in (0.454 kg) (25 mm) (145 mm)
  • Page 156 Issue 10.0 Table 2-27 SV9100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued) Shipping Unit Height Width Depth Weight DTL-12BT-1 TEL 45.6 oz 4.29 in 7.6 in 10.16 in (1.3 kg) (109 mm) (183 mm) (258 mm) DTL-12PA-1 TEL 45.6 oz 4.41 in 7.6 in 10.16 in (1.3 kg) (112 mm)
  • Page 157 Issue 10.0 Table 2-27 SV9100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued) Shipping Unit Height Width Depth Weight ITL-12D-1 TEL 42.33 oz 4.41 in 7.05 in 10.16 in (1.2 kg) (112 mm) (179 mm) (258 mm) ITL-12CG-3 TEL 49.38 oz 4.41 in 7.05 in 10.94 in (1.4 kg) (112 mm)
  • Page 158 Issue 10.0 Table 2-27 SV9100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued) Shipping Unit Height Width Depth Weight Optional 8LK-K UNIT 3.53 oz 1.53 in 1.26 in 8.70 in (0.1 kg) (39 mm) (32 mm) (222 mm) 8LK-L UNIT 7.05 oz 1.77 in 1.15 in 8.82 in (0.2 kg)
  • Page 159 Issue 10.0 Table 2-27 SV9100 Weights and Dimensions (Continued) Shipping Unit Height Width Depth Weight AC-Z UNIT 9.9 oz 1.34 in 1.9 in 4.3 in (0.28 kg) (34 mm) (48 mm) (109 mm) WM-L UNIT 1.58 oz 0.996 in 3.996 in 4.92 in (0.045 kg) (25.3 mm)

  • Page 160: Table 2-28 Tone Patterns

    Tone Patterns Table 2-28 Tone Patterns lists the frequency and the pattern for the tones. Tones are used to inform UNIVERGE SV9100 station users of system functions such as dial tone, busy tone, or ringback tone. 7.9.2 Multiline Terminal LED Flash Patterns The UNIVERGE SV9100 system has several colored LEDs installed.
  • Page 161 Issue 10.0 Table 2-28 Tone Patterns System Tone Frequency (Hz) Intermit Cycle (Fixed) (Fixed) (Default) 0.5 sec Busy Tone 480/620 60 IPM 0.5 sec 0.5 sec Call Waiting Tone 60 IPM 0.5 sec 0.25 sec Second Dial Tone 350/440 120 IPM 0.25 sec 2400 Modulation Howler Tone...

  • Page 162: Table 2-29 Multiline Terminal Led Flash Pattern

    Issue 10.0 Table 2-29 Multiline Terminal LED Flash Pattern Condition Color Flash Patterns I-Use Green Busy Incoming Call I-Hold Green Call Hold Line Key Hold Recall Green Transfer Recall Green Live Monitoring Mode Green Message Waiting on Line Key Microphone ON (Series i) Incoming Internal Call Incoming Outside Call...

  • Page 163: Table 2-30 Traffic Capacity Chart

    Issue 10.0 ECTION RAFFIC APACITY Table 2-30 Traffic Capacity Chart provides information about the traffic capacity for the basic system package and expanded system package. Table 2-30 Traffic Capacity Chart Expanded System Traffic Capacity Basic System Package Package Traffic Capacity 9200 BHCA (Maximum) 9200 BHCA (Maximum) (GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20)
  • Page 164 Issue 10.0 2-58 SV9100 System Specifications...

  • Page 165: Precautionary Information

    UNIVERGE ® SV9100 Chapter 3 Installing the SV9100 Chassis ECTION ENERAL NFORMATION This chapter contains information to help the technician install the chassis for the SV9100 system. The technician should be familiar with this section before installing any equipment. MDF/IDF C ECTION REPARATION AND ONSTRUCTION...

  • Page 166: Surveying The Customer Site

     flooding. The chassis should not be located directly beneath pipes. Leaks or  condensation could damage the UNIVERGE SV9100 system equipment. The area where the chassis is located must be free of corrosive and  inflammable gases, excessive chemical or industrial dusts, and other materials that could cause a hazard to personnel or to the proper functioning of the equipment.
  • Page 167 Issue 10.0 2.3.2 Selecting a Permanent MDF Location When selecting a permanent site for the MDF, the technician may encounter some of the following conditions: Limited space is available but must be used.  The available space may pose one or more environmental hazards. ...

  • Page 168: Table 3-1 Power Failure Transfer Connections

    Issue 10.0 The system requires a 3-prong dedicated 100 - 240 VAC 50/60 Hz circuit located within seven feet of the AC receptacle. Telco should install the RJ21X to the right of the Controlling Chassis. Extension blocks should be installed to the left of the Controlling Chassis.

  • Page 169: Fax Co Branch Connection

    Inspect the equipment for any physical damage. If you are not sure about the function of a component, review the associated information within this manual. Contact your authorized NEC Sales Representative if you have additional questions. Note that the chassis does not initially contain any blades.

  • Page 170: Before Installation

    Issue 10.0 Before Installation Before installing the chassis check the following: Ensure that the MPS7101(Power Supply Unit) is OFF and that the power cord is  disconnected from the AC outlet. When installing the blades, do not touch the soldered surfaces as this may ...
  • Page 171 Issue 10.0 Figure 3-1 CHS2UG Chassis (Front View) Universal Slot for Legacy Line/Trunk blades and Application blades (six slots). When used as controlling chassis, the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 is mounted in Slot 1 (shown). Slot for GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20/GPZ-BS11blade – Connection with CHS2UG chassis Power Switch Figure 3-2 CHS2UG Chassis (Rear View) AC Connector...

  • Page 172: Figure 3-4 Installing The Gcd-Cp10 Or Gcd-Cp20 Blade

    Issue 10.0 3.3.1 Installing the 19” Controlling Chassis Ensure the chassis is powered down. Do not remove or install blades with the power on. WARNING Align the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 blade with the Slot 1 guides of the Controlling Chassis. Figure 3-3 19”...
  • Page 173 The Expansion cable connects the Controlling Chassis and its GPZ-BS10 or GPZ-BS20 interface to the second, third, and fourth GPZ-BS11 interface. Use only the CAT 5 cables provided by NEC to make the connections between the Controlling and Expansion Chassis.

  • Page 174: Figure 3-6 Gpz-Bs10/Gpz-Bs20 Components

    Issue 10.0 3.3.2.1 Connector Pin-Out on GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20/GPZ-BS11 Table 3-3 GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20/GPZ-BS11 Connector Pin-Out RJ-61 Cable Connector GPZ-BS10 / GPZ-BS20 – CN2, CN3, CN 4 GPZ-BS11 – CN3 Pin No. Connection HW_UP (+) HW_UP (-) HW_DWN (+) FS (+) FS (-) HW_DWN (-) CK8M (+) CK8M (-) 3.3.2.2...

  • Page 175: Figure 3-7 Gpz-Bs10/Gpz-Bs20 Expansion Bay In Controlling Chassis

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-7 GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 Expansion Bay in Controlling Chassis Expansion Bay From the left side of the chassis, pull cover outward to expose the expansion bay. Figure 3-8 Open Base Chassis Cover Pull the cover toward you to remove. ...

  • Page 176: Figure 3-9 Gpz-Bs10/Gpz-Bs20 Blade Guides

    Issue 10.0 Align the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 blade with the guides located in the expansion bay. Figure 3-9 GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 Blade Guides Slide the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 blade into the chassis until resistance (back plane) is felt. Figure 3-10 Installing GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 Blade in Expansion Bay Gently push until the blade seats and install the supplied retaining screw.

  • Page 177: Figure 3-11 Gpz-Bs10/Gpz-Bs20 Blade Installed

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-11 GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 Blade Installed Close the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 cover. Figure 3-12 GPZ-BS10 GPZ-BS20 Installed (Cover Closed) 3.3.2.3 Install the GPZ-BS11 Expansion Blade in the CHS2UG Expansion Chassis Figure 3-13 GPZ-BS11 Components For the Expansion Chassis to function, the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 blade must be installed in CAUTION Controlling Chassis.

  • Page 178: Figure 3-14 Gpz-Bs11 Expansion Bay In Expansion Chassis

    Issue 10.0 Do not remove or install this blade with the power WARNING Ensure the chassis is powered down. Locate the door positioned on the left end (expansion bay) of the Expansion Chassis. Figure 3-14 GPZ-BS11 Expansion Bay in Expansion Chassis Expansion Bay From the left side of the chassis, pull cover outward to expose the expansion bay (refer to...

  • Page 179: Figure 3-16 Gpz-Bs11 Blade Guides

    Issue 10.0 Align the GPZ-BS11 blade with the guides located within the expansion bay. Figure 3-16 GPZ-BS11 Blade Guides Slide the GPZ-BS11 blade into the chassis until resistance (back plane) is felt. Figure 3-17 Installing GPZ-BS11 Blade in Expansion Chassis Gently push until the blade seats and install the supplied retaining screw.

  • Page 180: Figure 3-18 Gpz-Bs11 Blade Installed

    Issue 10.0 Align the door tabs with hinges and reattach the cover. Figure 3-18 GPZ-BS11 Blade Installed Close the GPZ-BS11 blade cover. Figure 3-19 GPZ-BS11 Installed (Cover Closed) 3-16 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 181: Connect The Controlling And Expansion Chassis

    Controlling Chassis GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 Ensure Controlling and Expansion chassis are powered down. Using the NEC provided CAT5 straight-through cable(s), attach one end to each Expansion Chassis CN2 connector on the GPZ-BS11 blade (see Figure 3-21 System Expansion Cabling on page 3-18).

  • Page 182: Figure 3-21 System Expansion Cabling

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-21 System Expansion Cabling Install in Expansion Chassis Install in Expansion Chassis Install in Expansion Chassis Install in Controlling Chassis Repeat for additional Expansion Chassis. 3-18 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 183: Figure 3-22 Chassis Grounding Lug

    Issue 10.0 3.3.3 Install Grounding on 19” Chassis From the factory, the SG, ETH and PBXG grounds are located inside the chassis and are connected to the FG ground (frame ground) on the back of the chassis. Each chassis (CHS2UG) in the system must be grounded separately using the procedure listed below.

  • Page 184: Figure 3-23 19" Chassis Grounding Lug (Multiple-Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-23 19” Chassis Grounding Lug (Multiple-Chassis) FG Lugs Electrical Service Ground 3.3.5 Install AC Power Cords on 19” Chassis Locate the supplied AC power cord and attach to the AC Inlet located on the back of the Controlling Chassis. Figure 3-24 Install the AC Power Cord CHS2UG AC Inlet...

  • Page 185: Figure 3-25 Install 19" Ac Power Cords (Multiple-Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 3.3.6 Install AC Power Cords on Multiple 19” Chassis (Optional) To install the AC power cords, locate the supplied AC power cords and attach to the AC Inlets located on the back of the Controlling and Expansion Chassis. Figure 3-25 Install 19”...

  • Page 186: Figure 3-26 9.5" Chassis (Front View)

    Issue 10.0 Installing the 9.5” Base (CHS2UG B) Chassis The CHS2UG B chassis has three universal blade slots for station, trunk and optional blades. Before proceeding with installation of chassis, ensure site preparation is completed. The chassis can be: Wall-mounted – refer to 4.2 Wall Mounting the 9.5”...
  • Page 187 Issue 10.0 3.4.1 Install Grounding on 9.5” Chassis Ensure the 9.5” chassis is powered off and the AC power cord is unplugged. Ground the chassis by connecting a 14 AWG wire from the FG lug on the back side of the chassis to an electrical service ground (such as a cold water pipe).

  • Page 188: Figure 3-28 9.5"Base And Expansion (Combined) Chassis

    Issue 10.0 Installing the 9.5” Base (CHS2UG B) and Expansion (CHS2UG E) Chassis The CHS2UG B and CHS2UG E chassis combined have six universal blade slots for legacy line/trunk blade (Single Line Telephone Interface, Digital multiline terminal Interface, Central Office Trunk, ISDN PRI Interface, etc.), In-skin Application Blades (In-skin UMS, In-Skin Router, etc.).

  • Page 189: Figure 3-29 Removing Backboard Cover

    Issue 10.0 The 9.5" Base chassis provides up to 16 trunk ports or 32 extension ports. An Expansion Chassis can be installed to the right of the Controlling or Base Chassis providing an additional 48 ports (40 trunk/ 80 stations maximum) and can include any combination of stations and trunks below this number.

  • Page 190: Figure 3-30 Installing The Expansion Bracket

    Issue 10.0 Match the Joint Bracket with screw holes A, B, C and D on the side of the Base Chassis (refer to Figure 3-30 Installing the Expansion Bracket), and install with four M4 x 14 screws. Figure 3-30 Installing the Expansion Bracket From the Expansion Chassis, loosen and remove screws d and e from the top cover (refer to Figure 3-31 Remove Expansion Chassis...

  • Page 191: Figure 3-32 Connecting The Base And Expansion Chassis

    Issue 10.0 Align the Backboard Connector on the Expansion and Base chassis (refer to Figure 3-32 Connecting the Base and Expansion Chassis), and push the two chassis together. Figure 3-32 Connecting the Base and Expansion Chassis Secure the Base and Expansion chassis using four screws in holes D and E on the top (refer to Figure 3-33 Securing the Expansion Chassis to the Expansion...

  • Page 192: Figure 3-35 Installing Reinforcement Bracket

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-34 Install Expansion Chassis Cover Using two screws, secure the Base and Expansion chassis together with the metal reinforcement bracket provided. Be sure to mount the Reinforcement Bracket with the 9.5 inch Base and Expansion Chassis in the vertical position. IMPORTANT The Reinforcement Bracket and two screws are provided with the 9.5 inch Chassis.
  • Page 193 The Expansion cable connects the Controlling Chassis and its GPZ-BS10/ GPZ-BS20 interface to the second, third, and fourth GPZ-BS11 interface. Use only the CAT 5 cables provided by NEC to make the connections between the Controlling and Expansion Chassis. The GPZ-BS10 provides: Communication Processor Interface for data handling through ...

  • Page 194: Figure 3-36 Gpz-Bs10/Gpz-Bs20 Components

    Issue 10.0 3.5.2.1 Connector Pin-Out on GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20/GPZ-BS11 Table 3-4 GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20/GPZ-BS11 Connector Pin-Out RJ-61 Cable Connector GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 – CN2, CN3, CN 4 GPZ-BS11 – CN3 Pin No. Connection HW_UP (+) HW_UP (-) HW_DWN (+) FS (+) FS (-) HW_DWN (-) CK8M (+) CK8M (-) 3.5.2.2 Install the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 Expansion Base Blade...

  • Page 195: Figure 3-41 Chs2Ug B Expansion Bay

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-37 CHS2UG B Expansion Bay Pull the cover toward you to remove. Cover must be removed prior to installation of GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 blade. IMPORTANT Remove knockout in center of cover. Align the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 blade with the guides located in the expansion bay. Slide the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 blade into the chassis until resistance (back plane) is felt (refer to Figure 3-38 Installing...

  • Page 196: Figure 3-38 Installing The Gpz-Bs10/Gpz-Bs20

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-38 Installing the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 Install the supplied retaining screw (refer to Figure 3-38 Installing the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20). Insert tabs a, b and c into holes A, B and C (refer to Figure 3-39 Completing the Installation) and close the cover. Figure 3-39 Completing the Installation 3-32 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 197: Figure 3-40 Gpz-Bs11 Components

    Issue 10.0 3.5.2.3 Install the GPZ-BS11 Expansion Blade in the CHS2UG B Expansion Chassis Figure 3-40 GPZ-BS11 Components For the Expansion Chassis to function, the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 blade must be installed in CAUTION Controlling Chassis. Do not remove or install this blade with the power WARNING Ensure the chassis is powered down.

  • Page 198: Figure 3-42 Installing The Gpz-Bs11

    Issue 10.0 Align the GPZ-BS11 blade with the guides located in the expansion bay. Slide the GPZ-BS11 blade into the chassis until resistance (back plane) is felt. Figure 3-42 Installing the GPZ-BS11 Install the supplied retaining screw. Insert tabs a, b and c into holes A, B and C (refer to Figure 3-43 Completing the Installation) and close the cover.

  • Page 199: Figure 3-44 System Expansion Cabling

    CAUTION expansion cabling Ensure Controlling and Expansion chassis are powered down. Using the NEC provided CAT5 straight-through cable(s), attach one end to each Expansion Chassis CN2 connector on the GPZ-BS11 blade (see Figure 3-44 System Expansion Cabling). Attach the opposite end to the CN2, CN3 or CN4 connector on the GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS20 of the Controlling Chassis.

  • Page 200: Figure 3-45 9.5" Chassis (Rear View)

    Issue 10.0 EXAMPLE: 0 CHS2UG (19” Chassis) & 4 CHS2UG B/CHS2UG E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5” Expansion Chassis) 1 CHS2UG (19” Chassis) & 3 CHS2UG B/CHS2UG E (9.5” Base Chassis/9.5” Expansion Chassis) 2 CHS2UG (19” Chassis) & 2 CHS2UG B/CHS2UG E (9.5”...
  • Page 201 Issue 10.0 3.5.4 Install Grounding on Multiple 9.5” Base and Expansion Chassis From the factory, the SG, ETH and PBXG grounds are located inside the chassis and are connected to the FG ground (frame ground) on the back of the chassis. Each chassis (CHS2UG B) in the system must be grounded separately using the procedure listed below.

  • Page 202: Figure 3-46 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (19" Chassis)

    ❍ chassis will be positioned. This allows secure anchoring of the screws which support the weight of the chassis. Due to chassis weight, NEC recommends only a single ❍ CHS2UG chassis per wall mount. Use the template shown in Figure 3-46 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (19”...
  • Page 203 Issue 10.0 Figure 3-46 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (19” Chassis) Mark and drill the six holes required for a wall installation. Align screw holes in wall mount brackets with drilled holes. Using six screws, secure the two wall mount brackets to the wall. SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-39...

  • Page 204: Figure 3-47 Install Wall Mount Brackets With Screws

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-47 Install Wall Mount Brackets with Screws 3-40 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 205: Figure 3-48 Securing Metal Fittings To Chassis With Screws

    Issue 10.0 Using four screws, secure the metal fittings on the Left and Right sides of the 19” chassis. Figure 3-48 Securing Metal Fittings to Chassis with Screws SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-41...

  • Page 206: Figure 3-49 Secure Metal Fitting To Upper Wall Mount Bracket With A Screw

    Issue 10.0 Align the metal fitting with the upper wall mount bracket. The lower metal fitting rests against the lower wall mount bracket. Secure the metal fitting and upper wall mount bracket with a single screw. Figure 3-49 Secure Metal Fitting to Upper Wall Mount Bracket with a Screw 3-42 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 207: Figure 3-50 Secure Metal Fitting To Lower Wall Mount Bracket With Screws

    Issue 10.0 Using two screws, secure the metal fitting to the lower wall mount bracket. Refer to Figure 3-50 Secure Metal Fitting to Lower Wall Mount Bracket with Screws for screw location. Figure 3-50 Secure Metal Fitting to Lower Wall Mount Bracket with Screws Attach the supplied cable support bracket to either end of the lower wall mount bracket with a single screw (refer to Figure 3-51 Attach...

  • Page 208: Figure 3-51 Attach Cable Support Bracket To Lower Wall Mount Bracket

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-51 Attach Cable Support Bracket to Lower Wall Mount Bracket 3-44 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 209: Figure 3-52 Attachment Locations Of Cable Support Bracket

    Issue 10.0 The cable support bracket can be installed any of the four corners of the 19” chassis (refer to Figure 3-52 Attachment Locations of Cable Support Bracket on page 3-45). Figure 3-52 Attachment Locations of Cable Support Bracket Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 3.3.3 Install Grounding on 19”...

  • Page 210: Figure 3-53 Wall Mount Positioning For 9.5" Base/Expansion Chassis

    Issue 10.0 Wall Mounting the 9.5” Chassis When wall mounting the chassis, ensure the wall can support the weight of the chassis and (25 lbs per system chassis ---- including blades, cords, power supply, etc.). The chassis is secured to the wall with a wall mount bracket. Optional wall mounting procedures exist for the 9.5”...

  • Page 211: Figure 3-54 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (9.5" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 When mounting the Expansion chassis, leave a space of approximately 0.4 in  (10mm) between the two for the EXIFU cable. Figure 3-54 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (9.5” Chassis) Use the template shown in Figure 3-54 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (9.5”...

  • Page 212: Figure 3-55 Anchor Bolt From Wall (9.5" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-55 Anchor Bolt from Wall (9.5” Chassis) Align the upper bracket holes a and b with the heads of anchor bolts A and B mounted on the wall and slide downward (refer to Figure 3-56 Align Bracket on Wall (9.5” Chassis)).

  • Page 213: Figure 3-57 Install Upper Bracket (9.5" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Align holes E and F on the MV bracket (upper) with holes on the 9.5 inch Basic Chassis (CHS2UG B). Install 2 M4 x 14 screws. 2 M4 x 14 screws are provided with the CHS2UG - MOVABLE WALL MOUNT KIT.

  • Page 214: Figure 3-58 Optional Small Battery Box (9.5" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-58 Optional Small Battery Box (9.5” Chassis) Align holes G and H on the MV bracket (lower) with holes on the 9.5 inch Basic Chassis (CHS2UG B). Install 2 M4 x 14 screws. 2 M4 x 14 screws are provided with the CHS2UG - MOVABLE WALL MOUNT KIT.

  • Page 215: Figure 3-60 Install Lower Bracket (9.5" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Remove the tape preventing the pin washers from falling off the bottom of the wall mounting bracket. Align the pins shown in step 4 above, with the hinges on the upper and lower brackets mounted on the 9.5 inch Base (CHS2UG B) chassis. Figure 3-60 Install Lower Bracket (9.5”...

  • Page 216: Figure 3-62 Install The Shaft (9.5" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Attach the shaft from the mounted wall bracket to the lower bracket and secure using the supplied retaining washer. Figure 3-62 Install the Shaft (9.5” Chassis) Using the 2 M3 x 6 spring washer screws supplied, install the stopper between the chassis and the wall mounted bracket.

  • Page 217: Figure 3-64 Chassis Installed (9.5" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Lift the shaft and close the 9.5 inch chassis. To secure the chassis to the wall, tighten the knurled screws located on the upper and lower brackets. Figure 3-64 Chassis Installed (9.5” Chassis) Connect grounding wire to chassis. Refer to Chapter 4 paragraph Installing the 9.5”...

  • Page 218: Figure 3-65 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (Base And Expansion Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 4.2.1.1 Wall Mounting the 9.5” Base (CHS2UG B) and Expansion (CHS2UG E) Chassis Figure 3-65 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (Base and Expansion Chassis) Use the template shown in Figure 3-65 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (Base and Expansion Chassis) for required spacing before drilling.

  • Page 219: Figure 3-66 Anchor Bolt From Wall (9.5" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-66 Anchor Bolt from Wall (9.5” Chassis) Remove the M4 x 8 screws from the wall mount bracket. Use the screw holes marked with the number 2 on the upper and lower brackets. Figure 3-67 Remove Support Bracket (Base and Expansion Chassis) SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-55...

  • Page 220: Figure 3-68 Install Support Bracket (Base And Expansion Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Turn the support 90° and install the M4 x 8 screws previously removed. Figure 3-68 Install Support Bracket (Base and Expansion Chassis) Attach the MV bracket (upper and lower) to the 9.5 inch Base and Expansion chassis. Refer to section 4.2.1 Option 1 –...

  • Page 221: Figure 3-69 Chassis Installed (Base And Expansion Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-69 Chassis Installed (Base and Expansion Chassis) Connect grounding wire to chassis. Refer to Chapter 4 paragraph 3.5 Installing the 9.5” Base (CHS2UG B) and Expansion (CHS2UG E) Chassis on page 3-24 for complete details on grounding the system. Refer to 3.5.5 Install AC Power Cord on 9.5”...

  • Page 222: Figure 3-70 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (9.5" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 4.2.2 Option 2 – Wall Mounting the 9.5 inch Base CHS2UG B Chassis Figure 3-70 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (9.5” Chassis) Use the template shown in Figure 3-54 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (9.5” Chassis) for required spacing before drilling. Plywood should first be installed on the wall where the chassis will be positioned.

  • Page 223: Figure 3-71 Anchor Bolt From Wall (9.5" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-71 Anchor Bolt from Wall (9.5” Chassis) 4.2.2.1 Wall Mounting the CHS2UG B without the CHS2UG B Small Batt Box Align the bracket halves (refer to Figure 3-72 Wall Mounting Brackets (Option 2)). Figure 3-72 Wall Mounting Brackets (Option 2) SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-59...

  • Page 224: Figure 3-73 Install Upper Bracket (Option 2)

    Issue 10.0 Align holes E and F on the MV bracket (upper) with holes on the 9.5 inch Basic Chassis (CHS2UG B). Install 2 M4 x 14 screws. M4 x 14 screws are provided with the WALL MOUNT BRACKET. Figure 3-73 Install Upper Bracket (Option 2) Align holes G and H on the MV bracket (lower) with holes on the 9.5 inch Basic Chassis (CHS2UG B).

  • Page 225: Figure 3-75 Install Screws (Option 2)

    Issue 10.0 Align the upper and lower bracket holes with the heads of anchor bolts mounted on the wall and slide downward (refer to Figure 3-75 Install Screws (Option 2)). Figure 3-75 Install Screws (Option 2) Attach the MV bracket (upper and lower) to the 9.5 inch Base and Expansion chassis.

  • Page 226: Figure 3-76 Wall Mount Spacing Guide - 9.5" Base And Expansion Chassis

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-76 Wall Mount Spacing Guide – 9.5” Base and Expansion Chassis Connect grounding wire to chassis. Refer to Chapter 4 paragraph Installing the 9.5” Base (CHS2UG B) and Expansion (CHS2UG E) Chassis on page 3-24 for complete details on grounding the system. Refer to 3.5.5 Install AC Power Cord on 9.5”...

  • Page 227: Figure 3-77 Wall Mounting (Small Batt Box)

    Issue 10.0 4.2.2.2 Wall Mounting the CHS2UG B with the CHS2UG B Small Batt Box To install the CHS2UG B SMALL BATT BOX refer to section 8.3 Installing the CHS2UG B SMALL BATT BOX on the 9.5” CHS2UG B Chassis on page 3-104 Align the bracket halves (refer to Figure 3-72 Wall Mounting Brackets (Option...

  • Page 228: Figure 3-78 Brackets (Small Batt Box)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-78 Brackets (Small Batt Box) 3-64 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 229: Figure 3-79 Reposition Brackets (Small Batt Box)

    Issue 10.0 Align the holes marked as R and F. Figure 3-79 Reposition Brackets (Small Batt Box) SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-65...

  • Page 230: Figure 3-80 Install Screws (Small Batt Box)

    Issue 10.0 Install the four screws previously removed. Figure 3-80 Install Screws (Small Batt Box) Align the brackets with the holes on the sides of the 9.5 inch Basic Chassis (CHS2UG B). Install 2 M4 x 14 screws. Figure 3-81 Wall Mount – Upper Side (Small Batt Box) 3-66 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 231: Figure 3-82 Wall Mount - Lower Side (Small Batt Box)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-82 Wall Mount – Lower Side (Small Batt Box) Align the upper and lower bracket holes with the heads of anchor bolts mounted on the wall and slide downward. Connect grounding wire to chassis. Refer to Chapter 4 paragraph 3.5 Installing the 9.5”...

  • Page 232: Floor Mounting The Chassis

    Issue 10.0 ECTION LOOR OUNTING THE HASSIS Floor Mounting the 19” (CHS2UG) Chassis The CHS2UG controlling and expansion chassis can be mounted on the floor using the CHS BASE UNIT and the CHS2UG JOINT BRACKET KIT. 5.1.1 CHS2UG Chassis Installation Use the template shown in Figure 3-83 Floor Mount Spacing Guide for required spacing before drilling holes for 0.39”...

  • Page 233: Figure 3-85 Install Rubber Feet (19" Chassis)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-84 Secure CHS BASE UNIT with Anchor Bolts Install the five rubber feet to the bottom of the chassis. Figure 3-85 Install Rubber Feet (19” Chassis) Position the chassis on top of the CHS BASE UNIT. SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-69...

  • Page 234: Figure 3-86 Install Chs2Ug Joint Bracket Kit

    Issue 10.0 Secure the chassis to the CHS BASE UNIT using eight screws supplied with the CHS2UG JOINT BRACKET KIT. Figure 3-86 Install CHS2UG JOINT BRACKET KIT Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 3.3.3 Install Grounding on 19” Chassis on page 3-19 for complete details on grounding the system.

  • Page 235: Figure 3-87 Install Rubber Feet For Multiple Chassis

    Issue 10.0 5.1.2 Multiple CHS2UG Chassis Installation Expansion chassis can be secured to the CHS BASE UNIT and require an additional CHS2UG JOINT BRACKET KIT per chassis. Install the five rubber feet to the bottom of each chassis. Figure 3-87 Install Rubber Feet for Multiple Chassis Using supplied screws in the CHS2UG JOINT BRACKET KIT, attach metal brackets to both ends of the 19”...

  • Page 236: Figure 3-89 Assemble Stand Mount With Screws

    Issue 10.0 Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 3.3.3 Install Grounding on 19” Chassis on page 3-19 for complete details on grounding the system. Refer to 3.3.5 Install AC Power Cords on 19” Chassis on page 3-20 continue installation of the chassis or, Chapter 6 paragraph Installation and Safety Precautions on page 4-4 for installation of...

  • Page 237: Figure 3-90 Secure Chs2Ug Chassis To Chs2Ug Stand Kit (K) With Screws

    Figure 3-91 Secure Stand Mount to Floor with Screws on page 3-74) To prevent possible damage to the 19” chassis due to falling, NEC recommends screws be installed in the stand mount brackets as soon as possible. WARNING SV9100 System Hardware Manual...
  • Page 238 Issue 10.0 Figure 3-91 Secure Stand Mount to Floor with Screws Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 3.3.3 Install Grounding on 19” Chassis on page 3-19 for complete details on grounding the system. Refer to 3.3.5 Install AC Power Cords on 19” Chassis on page 3-20 continue installation of the chassis or, Chapter 6 paragraph Installation and Safety Precautions on page 4-4 for installation of...

  • Page 239: Figure 3-92 Attach Rubber Feet To Chs2Ug Chassis

    Issue 10.0 6.1.2 Multiple CHS2UG Chassis Installation Expansion chassis (maximum of three) can be added to the CHS2UG STAND KIT (K) and require an additional CHS2UG STAND KIT (EXT) per chassis. Install the five rubber feet to the bottom of each chassis. Figure 3-92 Attach Rubber Feet to CHS2UG Chassis Each additional chassis requires a CHS2UG STAND KIT (EXT) to be installed (refer to...

  • Page 240: Figure 3-93 Install Additional Chs2Ug Stand Kit (Ext)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-93 Install Additional CHS2UG STAND KIT (EXT) Expansion Plates Metal brackets from the CHS2UG JOINT BRACKET KITs are required to secure the top end of the chassis with screws. See Figure 3-94 Install Additional Brackets from CHS2UG JOINT BRACKET KIT on page 3-77.

  • Page 241: Figure 3-94 Install Additional Brackets From Chs2Ug Joint Bracket Kit

    Figure 3-94 Install Additional Brackets from CHS2UG JOINT BRACKET KIT). To prevent possible damage to the 19” chassis due to falling, NEC recommends screws be installed in the stand mount brackets as soon as possible. WARNING Connect the ground wire to all chassis. Refer to 3.3.3 Install...

  • Page 242: Figure 3-95 Attaching The Base Stand

    Issue 10.0 Stand Mounting the 9.5” CHS2UG B Chassis The 9.5” chassis can be stand mounted using the brackets supplied. The following section describes this procedure. This bracket is not for use with a combined Base (CHS2UG B) and Expansion (CHS2UG E) chassis. A combined Base and Expansion chassis should only be rack or wall mounted.

  • Page 243: Figure 3-96 9.5" Chassis With Base Stand Attached

    Issue 10.0 When attaching the stand unit to the 9.5” Base chassis, ensure the shape of the stand unit aligns with the shape of the 9.5” chassis NOTE Figure 3-96 9.5” Chassis with Base Stand Attached Install tab slots D, E, F, G, H and I of either bracket (stand unit brackets can be mounted on the left or right side), on tabs d, e, f, g, h and i of the stand unit.

  • Page 244: Figure 3-98 Attaching The Second Stand Unit Bracket

    Issue 10.0 Install tab slots J, K, L, M, N and O of the remaining bracket on tabs j, k, l, m, n and o on the opposite side of the stand unit. Figure 3-98 Attaching the Second Stand Unit Bracket Align the support bracket with holes P and Q on the stand unit brackets and secure using the two M3 x 8 screws provided.

  • Page 245: Figure 3-100 Stand Mount 9.5" Chassis

    Figure 3-100 Stand Mount 9.5” Chassis Secure the 9.5” assembly to a flat surface with the four screws supplied. To prevent possible damage to the 19” chassis due to falling, NEC recommends screws be installed in the stand mount brackets as soon as possible.

  • Page 246: Rack Mounting The Chassis

    Issue 10.0 ECTION OUNTING THE HASSIS Rack Mounting the 19” (CHS2UG) Chassis A single or multiple chassis can be rack mounted. Controlling and Expansion chassis can be racked mounted by stacking them horizontally. The 19” chassis requires two rack mount brackets per chassis for mounting. Each 19"...

  • Page 247: Figure 3-103 Rack Mount 19" Chs2Ug

    Issue 10.0 Repeat for additional chassis mounting. Figure 3-102 Rack Mount Bracket Installed 19” CHS2UG Carefully slide the chassis into desired location in the rack. Make sure the hooks on the mounting bracket are inserted into the back of the chassis, securing it in place.

  • Page 248: Figure 3-104 Attach Rack Mount Brackets To 9.5" Chassis

    Issue 10.0 Refer to 3.3.5 Install AC Power Cords on 19” Chassis on page 3-20 continue installation of the chassis or, Chapter 6 paragraph 2.1 Installation and Safety Precautions on page 4-4 for installation of blades. Rack Mounting the 9.5” Base (CHS2UG B) and Expansion (CHS2UG E) Chassis To rack mount the combined Base (CHS2UG B) and Expansion (CHS2UG E) chassis, the IP5D-RACK MOUNT BAR SET is required.

  • Page 249: Figure 3-105 Attach Horizontal Rack Bars

    Issue 10.0 Attach the two horizontal rack bars at the correct positions on the rack with the screws provided. The bars are used to secure the chassis vertically in the rack. Figure 3-105 Attach Horizontal Rack Bars Secure the (CHS2UG B) and (CHS2UG E) chassis to the horizontal bars using two screws at each point (refer to Figure 3-106 Attach (CHS2UG B) and (CHS2UG E) Chassis to Rack on page...

  • Page 250: Figure 3-106 Attach (Chs2Ug B) And (Chs2Ug E) Chassis To Rack

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-106 Attach (CHS2UG B) and (CHS2UG E) Chassis to Rack Connect grounding wire to chassis. Refer to paragraph 3.5.4 Install Grounding on Multiple 9.5” Base and Expansion Chassis on page 3-37 complete details on grounding the system. Refer to 3.5.5 Install AC Power Cord on 9.5”...

  • Page 251: Figure 3-107 Removing Battery Access Panel

    Issue 10.0 ECTION ATTERY ONNECTION Two types of battery connection provide battery life during a power failure, the internal battery and an external battery with CHSG LARGE BATT BOX. Installing the Internal Batteries 19” (CHS2UG) Chassis An internal battery source using two batteries can be installed using the CHS2UG BATT MTG KIT (mounting kit) and CHS2U BATT CABLE INT (internal cabling).

  • Page 252: Figure 3-108 Removing Access Panel

    Issue 10.0 Remove access panel containing the fan. Refer to Figure 3-108 Removing Access Panel Figure 3-109 Access Panel Removed. Figure 3-108 Removing Access Panel Figure 3-109 Access Panel Removed 3-88 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 253: Figure 3-110 Secure Cable In Support Bracket

    Issue 10.0 Using tie wraps, secure CHS2U BATT CABLE INT in cable guide bracket. Figure 3-110 Secure Cable in Support Bracket With supplied screw, install cable guide in chassis. Figure 3-111 Installing Cable Support Guide Install two 2.3 AH-12V batteries (locally procured) into the CHS2UG BATT MTG KIT (refer to Figure 3-112 Installing Two Batteries on page 3-90).

  • Page 254: Figure 3-112 Installing Two Batteries

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-112 Installing Two Batteries Using the supplied screws, secure the brackets to the CHS2UG BATT MTG KIT (refer to Figure 3-112 Installing Two Batteries). Connect the provided battery cables to the batteries. Figure 3-113 Installing Battery Cable 3-90 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 255: Figure 3-114 Connecting Chs2U Batt Cable Int

    Issue 10.0 Connect CHS2U BATT CABLE INT to battery connector. Figure 3-114 Connecting CHS2U BATT CABLE INT Install CHS2UG BATT MTG KIT into CHS2UG chassis and tighten the retaining screws. Figure 3-115 Installing Battery Tray into CHS2UG Chassis SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-91...

  • Page 256: Figure 3-116 Installing The Access Panel

    Issue 10.0 Reinstall access panel containing the fan and secure with supplied screw. Figure 3-116 Installing the Access Panel Connect grounding and AC power cable. Installing the External Batteries 19” (CHS2UG) Chassis An optional (locally procured), external battery source can be used to provide power during a power failure.

  • Page 257: Figure 3-117 Floor Mount Spacing Guide

    Issue 10.0 8.2.1 Floor Mounting the CHSG LARGE BATT BOX ❍ Because of injury from falling equipment, wall mounting the CHSG LARGE BATT BOX is not recommended. WARNING ❍ Mounting the CHSG LARGE BATT BOX directly on the floor is not recommended. ❍...

  • Page 258: Figure 3-118 Installing The Chsg Large Batt Box Using The

    Issue 10.0 Align bolt holes in CHS BASE UNIT (see Figure 3-117 Floor Mount Spacing Guide on page 3-93) with holes drilled in floor and secure using four anchor bolts. Align and install the CHSG LARGE BATT BOX on top of the CHS BASE UNIT.

  • Page 259: Figure 3-120 Removing Battery Tray Suppressor

    Issue 10.0 Remove two screws from front of Battery Tray Suppressor. Figure 3-120 Removing Battery Tray Suppressor Slide Battery Tray Suppressor outward to remove. Slide Battery Tray(s) out of CHSG LARGE BATT BOX. Loosen two screws and remove the Battery Tray Cover. Figure 3-121 Removing Battery Tray Cover SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-95...

  • Page 260: Figure 3-123 Battery Cable Connection Guide

    Issue 10.0 Remove two screws and remove the Battery Tray Bracket. Figure 3-122 Removing Battery Tray Bracket Refer to Figure 3-123 Battery Cable Connection Guide for connection of battery cable to battery terminals. Repeat for additional battery connection. Incorrect Installation Of Batteries May Damage The Fuse Unit Or Cause Possible Fire.

  • Page 261: Figure 3-122 Removing Battery Tray Bracket

    Issue 10.0 Using two screws, install the Battery Tray Bracket. Refer to Figure 3-122 Removing Battery Tray Bracket on page 3-96. Figure 3-124 Installing Battery Connection Cable Insert Battery Connection Cable into cable guides. Refer to Figure 3-124 Installing Battery Connection Cable.

  • Page 262: Figure 3-126 Installing Cover Battery

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-125 Connecting Battery Cables Insert tabs on cover into holes on CHSG LARGE BATT BOX. Slide the cover left until seated and tighten the screw. Figure 3-126 Installing Cover Battery 8.2.3 CHSG LARGE BATT BOX to CHS2UG Connection Power down the CHS2UG chassis.

  • Page 263: Figure 3-127 Removing Fan Access Panel

    Issue 10.0 Remove fan access panel from rear of CHS2UG chassis. Figure 3-127 Removing Fan Access Panel Connect one end of Battery Connection Cable to Battery Connector on rear of Basic and Expansion chassis. Figure 3-128 Connecting External Battery to CHS2UG Connect other end of cable to Battery Connector on rear of CHSG LARGE BATT BOX chassis.

  • Page 264: Figure 3-129 Single Chsg Large Batt Box Connection

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-129 Single CHSG LARGE BATT BOX Connection Basic Expansion Figure 3-130 Dual CHSG LARGE BATT BOX Connection Basic Expansion 3-100 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 265: Figure 3-131 Install The Fan Access Panel

    Issue 10.0 Insert the access panel tab into the rear of the CHS2UG chassis running the Battery Connection Cable through the cutout. Secure panel with the retaining screw. Figure 3-131 Install the Fan Access Panel Connect grounding and AC power cables. Apply power to chassis (refer to Chapter 4, 2.6 Powering Up the SV9100 System on page...

  • Page 266: Figure 3-133 Removing Battery Tray Suppressor

    Issue 10.0 Remove two screws from front of Battery Tray Suppressor (Refer to Figure 3-133 Removing Battery Tray Suppressor). Figure 3-133 Removing Battery Tray Suppressor Slide Battery Tray Suppressor outward to remove. Disconnect the Battery Connection Cables from the Fuse Unit. Figure 3-134 Disconnecting Battery Cables Loosen two screws and pull Fuse Unit out of the CHSG LARGE BATT BOX.

  • Page 267: Figure 3-134 Disconnecting Battery Cables

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-135 CHSG LARGE BATT BOX Fuse Unit Slide the Fuse Unit into the and tighten the two screws (refer to Figure 3-134 Disconnecting Battery Cables on page 3-102). Plug the Battery Connection Cables into the Fuse Unit. Figure 3-136 Connecting Battery Cables SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-103...

  • Page 268: Figure 3-137 Installing Cover Battery

    Issue 10.0 Insert tabs on cover into holes on CHSG LARGE BATT BOX. Slide the cover left until seated and tighten the screw. Figure 3-137 Installing Cover Battery Installing the CHS2UG B SMALL BATT BOX on the 9.5” CHS2UG B Chassis An optional, CHS2UG B SMALL BATT BOX can be installed to provide external battery power to the CHS2UG GW and CHS2UG B chassis during a power...

  • Page 269: Figure 3-138 Installing Battery Cable Assembly

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-138 Installing Battery Cable Assembly Remove the battery connector cap on the Base chassis and connect the battery connection cable. Figure 3-139 Installing Battery Connection Cable SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-105...

  • Page 270: Figure 3-140 Removing Battery Cover

    Issue 10.0 Remove the two M3 x 8 screws from the Small Battery Box, then remove the battery cover (refer to Figure 3-140 Removing Battery Cover). Figure 3-140 Removing Battery Cover Place the two batteries into the Small Battery Box (refer to Figure 3-141 Installing Batteries on page 3-107).

  • Page 271: Figure 3-141 Installing Batteries

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-141 Installing Batteries Route battery cables a and b under the Small Battery Box tabs and connect to connectors A and B. Figure 3-142 Connecting Battery Cables Insert tabs c and d of the battery cover into slots C and D of the Small Battery Box.

  • Page 272: Figure 3-144 Unlocking The Small Battery Box

    Issue 10.0 Figure 3-143 Installing Battery Cover Pull the battery lock of the Small Battery Box forward to unlock it. Figure 3-144 Unlocking the Small Battery Box 3-108 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 273: Figure 3-145 Installing Small Battery Box

    Issue 10.0 Align the Small Battery Box with the grooves at the top and bottom of the Base chassis and slide into position. Figure 3-145 Installing Small Battery Box Push the battery lock in, then connect the battery cable. Figure 3-146 Locking the Small Battery Box SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-109...

  • Page 274: Figure 3-147 Disconnecting The Battery Cables

    Issue 10.0 Connect grounding wire to chassis. Refer to Chapter 4 paragraph Installing the 9.5” Base (CHS2UG B) and Expansion (CHS2UG E) Chassis on page 3-24 for complete details on grounding the system Refer to 3.5.5 Install AC Power Cord on 9.5” Base and Expansion Chassis on page 3-37 for installation of the power cord or, Chapter 6 paragraph...

  • Page 275: Figure 3-148 Removing The Fuse

    Mounting the CHSG LARGE BATT BOX directly on the floor is not recommended. Due to possible water damage, floor mounting the 9.5” chassis is ❍ not recommended by NEC. The CHS BASE UNIT raises the height of the CHSG LARGE BATT BOX 120mm (4.72”). NOTE 8.4.1...

  • Page 276: Figure 3-149 9.5" Chassis (Rear View)

    Issue 10.0 8.4.2 CHSG LARGE BATT BOX to 9.5” Gateway (CHS2UG GW) or Base (CHS2UG B) Chassis Connection Power down the CHS2UG GW or CHS2UG B chassis. Ensure the CHS2UG GW or CHS2UG B chassis is powered OFF. WARNING Disconnect AC power cable from rear of chassis. From the back of the 9.5”...

  • Page 277: Figure 3-150 Chsg Large Batt Box To Chs2Ug Gw Or Chs2Ug B Connection

    ECTION OWER UPPLY Do not attempt to replace the power supply on the CHS2UG B or CHS2UG GW chassis. The MPS7101 is not a field replaceable part. If the power supply fails, contact NEC. WARNING SV9100 System Hardware Manual 3-113...
  • Page 278 Follow the procedure below for the CHS2UG chassis. 10.1 CHS2UG Chassis 10.1.1 Remove Cooling Fan To reduce the possibility of electrical shock or damage to equipment, NEC recommends powering off the chassis and WARNING disconnecting the AC cable from the power source before removing the chassis cover.

  • Page 279: Install Cooling Fan

    Issue 10.0 Remove chassis access panel from rear of chassis. Remove cabling from retention clips. Figure 3-153 Chassis Access Panel Removed (19” Chassis) Remove two screws securing fan to access cover. Keep screws for use when installing replacement fan [refer to Figure 3-153 Chassis Access Panel Removed (19”...
  • Page 280 Issue 10.0 3-116 Installing the SV9100 Chassis...

  • Page 281: Slot Locations

    ENERAL NFORMATION This chapter contains information to help the technician install the blades for the UNIVERGE SV9100 system. The technician should be familiar with this section before installing any equipment. Slot Locations Each CHS2UG has six slots. In the Controlling Chassis, the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 (for Key Systems) must be installed in the first slot (slot 1).

  • Page 282: Figure 4-1 19" Chassis Cpu And Expansion Slot Locations

    Issue 10.0 Figure 4-1 19” Chassis CPU and Expansion Slot Locations Controlling Chassis CPU Slot Expansion Chassis GPZ-BS11 Slot Installing the SV9100 Blades...

  • Page 283: Figure 4-2 9.5" Base And Expansion Chassis Cpu Location

    Issue 10.0 Figure 4-2 9.5” Base and Expansion Chassis CPU Location Base Chassis CHS2UG B-US Base Chassis CHS2UG B-US GPZ-BS10, GPZ-BS20 or GPZ-BS11 Slot Expansion Chassis CHS2UG E SV9100 System Hardware Manual...

  • Page 284: Installation And Safety Precautions

    Issue 10.0 ECTION NSTALLATION Pre-installation planning is essential. Advanced planning minimizes installation time, cost, and disruption of the customer business activities. Installation and Safety Precautions Observe the following precautions when installing the blades to avoid static electricity damage to hardware or exposure to hazardous voltages.

  • Page 285: Figure 4-3 Inserting Blades In The 19" Chassis

    Issue 10.0 Installing an Extension or Trunk Blade 2.2.1 Installing the Blades To install an extension/trunk blade with the system running: Insert the blade in the guide rail and push it securely into position. Tighten the thumb screw on either side of the blade. The Status LED starts flashing when the blade starts processing (15 seconds).

  • Page 286: Order Of Installing Extension Blades

    Issue 10.0 2.2.2 Order of Installing Extension Blades The order in which the station blades (GCD-8DLCA with GPZ-8DLCB, GCD-16DLCA, GCD-4LCA, and GCD-8LCA with GPZ-8LCE) are physically inserted determines the numbering plan. To avoid unexpected extension/trunk numbering if the VoIP or Voice Mail daughter board registers with the system first, install these boards after the other extension and trunk blades are CAUTION...

  • Page 287: Table 4-2 Adding Daughter Board To Chassis Example

    Issue 10.0 Table 4-2 Adding Daughter Board to Chassis Example Blade Extension Blade Extension Blade Blade Slot # Numbers Slot # Numbers GCD-16DLCA 101~116 GCD-16DLCA 101~116 GCD-8DLCA 117~124 (no daughter — — board) GCD-16DLCA 125~140 GCD-16DLCA 125~140 GCD-8DLCA 141~156 (with daughter —...

  • Page 288: Table 4-3 Trunk Blade Installation Order Example

    Issue 10.0 For example, if four blades are installed in the following order, the numbering plan below applies. Table 4-3 Trunk Blade Installation Order Example Order of Blade Slot Blade Line Circuits Installation Number GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A with GPZ-4COTF or GPZ-4COTF-A GCD-4COTB or 9~12...

  • Page 289: Uninstalling A Blade Slot Through Software

    Controlling and Expansion Chassis in programming for port renumbering or to replace it with a different blade. Deleting a blade may affect blade slot programming ability. Refer to Program 90-05 in the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual for detailed information.

  • Page 290: Performing A Hot Start

    Issue 10.0 2.6.2 Performing a Hot Start The section describes how to load system software from flash memory and customer data from RAM memory. IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS System software is loaded from flash memory, and customer CAUTION data is from RAM memory. Turn the system power off.

  • Page 291: Port Defaults

    Issue 10.0 2.6.3.2 Port Defaults With the default settings, the ports are assigned as follows: Table 4-4 Default Port Settings Port 1~99 : 101~199 Station Ports: Port 100~199 : 3101~3200 Port 200~960 : 3201~3961 Port 1~99 : 201~299 Virtual Station Port 100~512 : No Setting Ports: 1~400...

  • Page 292: Backing Up/Restoring A Database

    Issue 10.0 2.6.3.5 Backing Up/Restoring a Database As a precaution, it is recommended that the customer database be saved prior to updating the system software. There are two methods to save the database – either use the PCPro application or save directly to USB Memory on the GCD-CP10 GCD-CP20.

  • Page 293: Performing A Software Upgrade

    Issue 10.0 2.6.4 Performing a Software Upgrade This section describes the procedure to perform a software upgrade on the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20. IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS To save customer data prior to updating, a blank USB Memory is ❍ CAUTION required. Insert the USB Memory into the USB Port on the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 blade.
  • Page 294 Issue 10.0 Turn the system power back on. When the system has completed reloading the software, the Status LED begins flashing on the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20. The remaining four LEDs are off. To confirm the new software version is installed, press the ...

  • Page 295: Figure 4-5 Gcd-Cp10 Blade Layout

    Issue 10.0 ECTION OMMON ONTROL LADES The blades described in this section control the common functions of the chassis. GCD-CP10 (SV9100 Central Processing Unit) Figure 4-5 GCD-CP10 Blade Layout SV9100 System Hardware Manual 4-15...

  • Page 296: Figure 4-6 Gcd-Cp10 Blade With Daughter Boards Installed

    Issue 10.0 Figure 4-6 GCD-CP10 Blade with Daughter Boards Installed 3.1.1 Description The GCD-CP10 controls all the functions and operations of the SV9100 system using the system software loaded into the GCD-CP10 memory. The system software can be upgraded as new software becomes available. One GCD-CP10 blade must be installed in the Controlling Chassis.
  • Page 297 Issue 10.0 GPZ-BS10/GPZ-BS11 Interface Circuit  Main Processing 32-Bit CPU Circuit (P1015 @ 533 MHz)  Time Switch, Optional Blade Control Circuit  Backboard Interface Circuit  The GCD-CP10 provides: 400 trunk ports maximum  896 extension ports maximum  896 ports digital/IP extensions maximum ...
  • Page 298  A load switch which is used for initial system startup, resetting the  system, or when upgrading system software One Serial Port (NEC production use only)  One SD/SDHC Card (VM) connector  One USB Port – USB 1.1/USB 2.0 ...

  • Page 299: Battery Installation And Removal

    Issue 10.0 3.1.2 Installation Each SV9100 system must have the GCD-CP10 installed in Slot 1 of the Controlling Chassis. IMPORTANT CONSIDERATIONS The chassis power must be off when installing or removing ❍ CAUTION the GCD-CP10. ❍ After removing a previously installed GCD-CP10, handle the blade, carefully, from the edges.

  • Page 300: Table 4-5 Sram Data Types

    Issue 10.0 Push down on the battery, opposite from the plus (+) symbol (refer to Figure 4-7 GCD-CP10 Battery Installation). Battery Removal Before removing the GCD-CP10 from the ❍ chassis to install or replace a battery, ensure CAUTION the system is powered Off. ❍...
  • Page 301 Issue 10.0 Load the SRAM data saved in step 1, above. From the PCPro “System Data Save/Load/Verify” menu load the data from the specified file. - OAI FLF Memory Battery replacement is complete. 3.1.2.2 GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board Installation Refer to Figure 4-13 Installing the GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board on page 4-39 to install the GPZ-IPLE daughter board,...

  • Page 302: Table 4-6 Gcd-Cp10 Switch Settings

    Issue 10.0 3.1.3 Switch Settings Refer to Table 4-6 GCD-CP10 Switch Settings for system restart/system reset and with system power on. Figure 4-5 GCD-CP10 Blade Layout on page 4-15 shows the location of the LOAD (S5) switch on the GCD-CP10 blade.

  • Page 303: Table 4-8 Gcd-Cp10 Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 3.1.4 LED Indications The LEDs on the GCD-CP10 indicate the following: RUN (D23) = The CPU is operating (green)  D20, and D21 = Alarms (red)  D22 = SD Memory Card access/Alarm indication (red)  D25 = The USB memory connection status (red) ...

  • Page 304: Table 4-9 Gcd-Cp10 Connections

    Issue 10.0 Table 4-8 GCD-CP10 LED Indications (Continued) LED Indication Status RUN (D23) Blinking On Steady When FPGA version error USB Memory is Installing Blinking On Steady When SRAM error USB Memory is Installing Blinking On Steady When SD memory booting error USB Memory is Installing Blinking...
  • Page 305 Issue 10.0 Table 4-9 GCD-CP10 Connections (Continued) Connector Connector Description AUX1/AUX2 Pin Jack for External Source Connection (External MOH, External Speaker, etc.) External Source Control Connection J6/S4 Used for Debug SD Memory Card Connection Backboard Connection GPZ-IPLE Connection Lithium Battery Socket - for backup of SRAM data and RTC (Real Time Clock) data LOAD (S5) Load Switch...
  • Page 306 Issue 10.0 Table 4-10 GCD-CP10 RJ45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs (Continued) Ethernet Cable Connector – J4 (RJ-45) (10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Port) Pin No. Connection – – – – Pin Jack – AUX1/AUX2 (Polarity) Pin No. Signal EXT1 EXT2 RJ-45 Cable Connector – J10 (External Source Control) (No Polarity) Pin No.

  • Page 307: Figure 4-8 Gcd-Cp20 Blade Layout

    Issue 10.0 GCD-CP20 (SV9100 Central Processing Unit) R10 or Higher Figure 4-8 GCD-CP20 Blade Layout SD Memory Card Slot SD Memory Card IPLE Connector Memory Backup Battery Installation Socket VoIP (J6) LAN Cable Connector Load Switch AUX ( ) IN/OUT (J11/J12) Connector for External Amplifiers and Audio Sources USB (J13) USB Connector...

  • Page 308: Figure 4-9 Gcd-Cp20 Blade With Daughter Boards Installed

    Issue 10.0 Figure 4-9 GCD-CP20 Blade with Daughter Boards Installed 3.2.1 Description The GCD-CP20 controls all the functions and operations of the SV9100 system using the system software loaded into the GCD-CP20 memory. The system software can be upgraded as new software becomes available. One GCD-CP20 blade must be installed in the Controlling Chassis.
  • Page 309 Issue 10.0 GPZ-BS20/GPZ-BS11 Interface Circuit  Main Processing 32-Bit CPU Circuit (P1015 @ 667 MHz)  Time Switch, Optional Blade Control Circuit  Backboard Interface Circuit  The GCD-CP20 provides: 400 trunk ports maximum  896 extension ports maximum  896 ports digital/IP extensions maximum ...
  • Page 310 Issue 10.0 One USB Port – USB 1.1/USB 2.0   Memory size – minimum of 32MB (normally 512MB or 1GB) should be used.  USB device power consumption is less than 200mA (1W). One Gbit Ethernet Port for VoIP function ...

  • Page 311: Figure 4-10 Gcd-Cp20 Battery Installation

    Issue 10.0 3.2.2.1 Battery Installation and Removal Battery Installation ❍ Keep away from open flame. Avoid excessive heat. WARNING ❍ Verify polarity (+, -) when installing battery. ❍ Do not short the electrodes (+, -) with metals such as wire. ❍...

  • Page 312: Figure 4-11 Gcd-Cp20 To Gcd-Cp20 Sd Card Exchange Not Allowed

    Used SD Card from another CPU blade . ❍ If the CPU (GCD-CP20) blade must be exchanged, arrange a new SD Card from NEC. The license must also be arranged for the new CPU’s Hardware Key Code. Figure 4-11 GCD-CP20 to GCD-CP20 SD Card Exchange Not Allowed...

  • Page 313: Table 4-11 Gcd-Cp20 Switch Settings

    Issue 10.0 3.2.2.4 Background Music (BGM) or Music on Hold (MOH) If external Background Music (BGM) or Music on Hold (MOH) is being installed, plug the cable into the AUX1 or AUX2 pin jack connector on the GCD-CP20. The other end of the cable plugs into the music source.

  • Page 314: Table 4-12 Gcd-Cp20 Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 3.2.4 LED Indications The LEDs on the GCD-CP20 indicate the following: RUN (D4) = The CPU is operating (green)  D28, and D29 = Alarms (red)  D30 = SD Memory Card access/Alarm indication (red)  D32 = The USB memory connection status (red) ...

  • Page 315: Table 4-13 Gcd-Cp20 Connections

    Issue 10.0 Table 4-12 GCD-CP20 LED Indications (Continued) LED Indication Status RUN (D4) Blinking On Steady When SRAM error USB Memory is Installing Blinking On Steady When SD memory booting error USB Memory is Installing Blinking On Steady When SD memory data error USB Memory is Installing Blinking...
  • Page 316 Issue 10.0 Table 4-13 GCD-CP20 Connections (Continued) Connector Connector Description SD Memory Card Connection Backboard Connection GPZ-IPLE Connection Lithium Battery Socket - for backup of SRAM data and RTC (Real Time Clock) data LOAD (S5) Load Switch Table 4-14 GCD-CP20 RJ45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs USB Cable Connector –...
  • Page 317 Issue 10.0 Table 4-14 GCD-CP20 RJ45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs (Continued) Pin Jack – AUX1/AUX2 (Polarity) Pin No. Signal EXT1 EXT2 RJ-45 Cable Connector – J10 (External Source Control) (No Polarity) Pin No. Connection EXCNT2 EXCNT1 EXCNT1 EXCNT2 SV9100 System Hardware Manual 4-37...

  • Page 318: Figure 4-12 Iple Daughter Board

    Issue 10.0 GPZ-IPLE (Voice over IP Daughter Board) Figure 4-12 IPLE Daughter Board 3.3.1 Description The current GPZ-IPLE daughter board requires a single DSP IP address. With SV9100 software and GPZ-IPLE daughter board ❍ installed, half-duplex connections are not supported. CAUTION ❍...

  • Page 319: Figure 4-13 Installing The Gpz-Iple Daughter Board

    3-8 for more details. Connect the IPLE daughter board to the CD-RTB or to an external switching hub using an Ethernet cable. Refer to the UNIVERGE SV9100 Programming Manual for detailed programming instructions. 3.3.3 Switch Settings This daughter board does not have any switch that needs to be set and does not require any hardware setting.

  • Page 320: Table 4-15 Iple Daughter Board Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 3.3.4 LED Indications LED indications for the GPZ-IPLE Daughter Board are indicated in Table 4-15 IPLE Daughter Board LED Indications on page 4-40. Each LED is listed with its associated function and LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-6 GCD-CP10 Blade with Daughter Boards Installed on page 4-16 for the location of the LEDs on the blades.

  • Page 321: Figure 4-14 Iple Led Interface

    Issue 10.0 Refer to Figure 4-14 IPLE LED Interface for a functional display of the LED interface when installed on a GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20. Figure 4-14 IPLE LED Interface 3.3.5 Connectors Figure 4-15 VoIP Connections on page 4-42 shows a typical connection layout.
  • Page 322 Issue 10.0 Figure 4-15 VoIP Connections 4-42 Installing the SV9100 Blades...
  • Page 323 Issue 10.0 Figure 4-16 Connecting an IPLE Daughter Board to a Network/PC SV9100 System Hardware Manual 4-43...

  • Page 324: Section 4 Station Blades

    Issue 10.0 ECTION TATION LADES GCD-8DLCA/GCD-16DLCA (Digital Station Interface) Figure 4-17 GCD-8DLCA/GCD-16DLCA Blade 4-44 Installing the SV9100 Blades...
  • Page 325 Issue 10.0 4.1.1 Description The GCD-8DLCA and the GCD-16DLCA are both discussed in this section. Any differences between the two are noted. These blades provide: 8 (GCD-8DLCA) OR 16 (GCD-16DLCA) digital extension circuits  (used for digital telephones, DSS consoles, SLT(1)-U( ) ADP, PGD(2)-U10 ADP adapters) These ports provide -48V feeding.

  • Page 326: Table 4-17 Gcd-8Dlca/Gcd-16Dlca Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 Table 4-17 GCD-8DLCA/GCD-16DLCA LED Indications LED Indication Operation Status Remarks Live LED Busy LED (Green) (Red) System Initializing – When you exceed the system capacity. Flash (1s) The assignment of the unit is refused. When the main software version is not matched.
  • Page 327 Issue 10.0 Table 4-18 GCD-8DLCA/GCD-16DLCA/ RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-61 Cable Connector GCD-8DLCA – CN101 (ports 1~4), CN201 (ports 5~8) GCD-16DLCA – CN101 (ports 1~4), CN201 (ports 5~8), CN301 (ports 9~12), CN401 (ports 13~16) Pin No. Connection T4 (Tip for port 4) T3 (Tip for port 3) T2 (Tip for port 2) R1 (Ring for port 1)
  • Page 328 Issue 10.0 GPZ-8DLCB (Digital Station Daughter Board) Figure 4-18 GPZ-8DLCB Daughter Board 4.2.1 Description The GPZ-8DLCB daughter board provides eight digital extensions. This daughter board is installed on the GCD-8DLCA and expands the port capacity for the combined blades to 16. 4-48 Installing the SV9100 Blades...

  • Page 329: Figure 4-17 Gcd-8Dlca/Gcd-16Dlca Blade

    Issue 10.0 Refer to the following tables for maximum upgrade capacities of the GPZ-8DLCB daughter board: Table 2-6 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG  Chassis on page 2-13 Table 2-7 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG B and  CHS2UG E Chassis on page 2-15 4.2.2 Installation...
  • Page 330 Issue 10.0 Table 4-19 GPZ-8DLCB RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs (Continued) RJ-61 Cable Connector CN401 (ports 13~16) Pin No. Connection (T4) Tip for port 16 (T3) Tip for port 15 (T2) Tip for port 14 (R1) Ring for port 13 (T1) Tip for port 13 (R2) Ring for port 14 (R3) Ring for port 15 (R4) Ring for port 16...

  • Page 331: Figure 4-19 Gcd-4Lca/Gcd-8Lca Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-4LCA/GCD-8LCA (4-Port/8-Port Single Line Interface) Figure 4-19 GCD-4LCA/GCD-8LCA Blade 4.3.1 Description The GCD-4LCA/GCD-8LCA blade provides four analog (SLIU) extension ports or eight analog (SLIU) extension ports (used for on-premise analog telephones, fax machines, and analog modems). SV9100 System Hardware Manual 4-51...
  • Page 332 Issue 10.0 The GCD-4LCA and GCD-8LCA are not rated for OPX use. A GCD-4DIOPA blade should be used instead (it supports the analog DID and single line telephone interface functions, such as Off-Premise Extensions). One extension status LED  One blade status LEDs ...

  • Page 333: Table 4-20 Gcd-4Lca/Gcd-8Lca Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 4.3.3 LED Indications LED indications for the GCD-4LCA GCD-8LCA are listed in Table 4-20 GCD-4LCA/GCD-8LCA LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-19 GCD-4LCA/GCD-8LCA Blade on page 4-51 for the location of the LEDs on the blades.
  • Page 334 Issue 10.0 Table 4-21 GCD-4LCA/GCD-8LCA RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-61 Cable Connector GCD-4LCA – CN2 (ports 1~4) GCD-8LCA – CN2 (ports 1~4) CN3 (ports 5~8) Pin No. Connection T4 (Tip for port 4) T3 (Tip for port 3) T2 (Tip for port 2) R1 (Ring for port 1) T1 (Tip for port 1) R2 (Ring for port 2...

  • Page 335: Figure 4-20 Installing The Gpz-4Lca/Gpz-8Lce Daughter Board

    Issue 10.0 GPZ-4LCA/GPZ-8LCE (4-Port/8-Port SLI Daughter Board) Figure 4-20 Installing the GPZ-4LCA/GPZ-8LCE Daughter Board 4.4.1 Description The GPZ-4LCA and GPZ-8LCE daughter boards are mounted on the GCD-4LCA/GCD-8LCA. These boards provide: 4-Port Single Line and 8-Port Single Line analog extension ports ...

  • Page 336: Table 4-22 Gpz-4Lca/Gpz-8Lce/ Rj-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs

    Issue 10.0 Each CN2 (GPZ-4LCA GPZ-8LCE) or CN3 (GPZ-8LCE only) connector provides connection to four analog station ports and is not polarity sensitive. The GPZ-8LCE consumes eight ports ranging between ports 001~256 (remember that the GCD-8LCA consumes eight ports). Refer to the following tables for maximum upgrade capacity of the GPZ-4LCA/GPZ-8LCE SLI daughter board: Table 2-6 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities –...
  • Page 337 Issue 10.0 Table 4-22 GPZ-4LCA/GPZ-8LCE/ RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-61 Cable Connector – GPZ-4LCA – CN2 (ports 9~12) GPZ-8LCE – CN2 (ports 9~12) CN3 (ports 13~16) Pin No. Connection T4 (Tip for port 4) T3 (Tip for port 3) T2 (Tip for port 2) R1 (Ring for port 1) T1 (Tip for port 1) R2 (Ring for port 2)

  • Page 338: Figure 4-21 Gcd-4Lcf/Gcd-8Lcf Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-4LCF/GCD-8LCF (4-Port/8-Port Single Line Interface) Figure 4-21 GCD-4LCF/GCD-8LCF Blade 4.5.1 Description The GCD-4LCF/GCD-8LCF blade provides four analog (SLIU) extension ports or eight analog (SLIU) extension ports (used for on-premise analog telephones, fax machines, and analog modems). 4-58 Installing the SV9100 Blades...
  • Page 339 Issue 10.0 The GCD-4LCF and GCD-8LCF are not rated for OPX use. A GCD-4DIOPA blade should be used instead (it supports the analog DID and single line telephone interface functions, such as Off-Premise Extensions). One extension status LED  One blade status LEDs ...

  • Page 340: Table 4-23 Gcd-4Lcf/Gcd-8Lcf Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 4.5.3 LED Indications LED indications for the GCD-4LCF GCD-8LCF are listed in Table 4-23 GCD-4LCF/GCD-8LCF LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-21 GCD-4LCF/GCD-8LCF Blade on page 4-58 for the location of the LEDs on the blades.
  • Page 341 Issue 10.0 Table 4-24 GCD-4LCF/GCD-8LCF RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-61 Cable Connector GCD-4LCF – J3 (ports 1~4) GCD-8LCF – J3 (ports 1~4), J4 (ports 5~8) Pin No. Connection T4 (Tip for port 4) T3 (Tip for port 3) T2 (Tip for port 2) R1 (Ring for port 1) T1 (Tip for port 1) R2 (Ring for port 2...

  • Page 342: Figure 4-22 Installing The Gpz-4Lcf/Gpz-8Lcf Daughter Board

    Issue 10.0 GPZ-4LCF/GPZ-8LCF (4-Port/8-Port SLI Daughter Board) Figure 4-22 Installing the GPZ-4LCF/GPZ-8LCF Daughter Board 4.6.1 Description The GPZ-4LCF and GPZ-8LCF daughter boards are mounted on the GCD-4LCF/GCD-8LCF. These boards provide: 4-Port Single Line and 8-Port Single Line analog extension ports ...

  • Page 343: Table 4-25 Gpz-4Lcf/Gpz-8Lcf/ Rj-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs

    Issue 10.0 Each J3 (GPZ-4LCF GPZ-8LCF) or J4 (GPZ-8LCF only) connector provides connection to four analog station ports and is not polarity sensitive. The GPZ-8LCF consumes eight ports ranging between ports 1~1536 (remember that the GCD-8LCF consumes eight ports). Refer to the following tables for maximum upgrade capacity of the GPZ-4LCF/GPZ-8LCF SLI daughter board: Table 2-6 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities –...
  • Page 344 Issue 10.0 Table 4-25 GPZ-4LCF/GPZ-8LCF/ RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-61 Cable Connector – GPZ-4LCF – J3 (ports 9~12) GPZ-8LCF – J3 (ports 9~12), J4 (ports 13~16) Pin No. Connection T4 (Tip for port 4) T3 (Tip for port 3) T2 (Tip for port 2) R1 (Ring for port 1) T1 (Tip for port 1) R2 (Ring for port 2)

  • Page 345: Figure 4-23 Gcd-Lta Blade

    Issue 10.0 term GCD-LTA (D /SLT Combination) Figure 4-23 GCD-LTA Blade 4.7.1 Description The Digital Station/SLT Combination blade provides eight Digital Station ports and two analog ports. This blade allows either a GPZ-4COTF or GPZ-4COTF-A analog trunk daughter board or GPZ-2BRIA daughter board to be installed.
  • Page 346 Issue 10.0 The blade provides: Eight Digital Station ports  Two analog extension ports support Caller ID Circuit, Message  Waiting Lamp Control (Controlling Voltage:-110Vdc) for all ports Two status LEDs  Refer to the following tables for maximum upgrade capacities of the GCD-LTA blade: Table 2-6 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities –...

  • Page 347: Table 4-26 Gcd-Lta Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 4.7.3 LED Indications LED indications for the GCD-LTA are indicated in Table 4-26 GCD-LTA LED Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-23 GCD-LTA Blade on page 4-65 the location of the LEDs on the blade.

  • Page 348: Table 4-27 Gcd-Lta Rj11 Cable Connector Pin-Outs

    Issue 10.0 4.7.4 Connectors Table 4-27 GCD-LTA RJ11 Cable Connector Pin-Outs shows the pin-outs for the RJ-61 connector. Refer to Figure 4-23 GCD-LTA Blade on page 4-65 for an illustration showing the location of the connectors on the GCD-LTA blade. Table 4-27 GCD-LTA RJ11 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ11 Cable Connector DLCA: CN101 (ports 1~4)

  • Page 349: Figure 4-24 Gcd-4Cotb Or Gcd-4Cotb-A Blade

    Issue 10.0 ECTION RUNK LADES GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A (4 Loop and Ground Start Interface) Figure 4-24 GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A Blade SV9100 System Hardware Manual 4-69...
  • Page 350 Issue 10.0 5.1.1 Description The GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A blade provides: GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A: Four analog loop start/ground start  trunk circuits One trunk status LED  One Blade status LED  Four Caller ID Circuits  Two Power Failure Transfer Circuits ...

  • Page 351: Table 4-28 Gcd-4Cotb Or Gcd-4Cotb-A Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 5.1.2 Installation Install the GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A blade into an available slot in the chassis. (Refer to Figure 4-24 GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A Blade on page 4-69 for a layout of the blade.)  If the GPZ-4COTF or GPZ-4COTF-A is to be used, install this prior to inserting the GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A blade into the chassis.
  • Page 352 Issue 10.0 Table 4-29 GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-61 Cable Connector – CN2, Trunks The CN2 connector is polarity sensitive (tip-to-tip, ring-to-ring) Pin No. Connection Circuit 4 – Tip Circuit 3 – Tip Circuit 2 – Tip Circuit 1 –...

  • Page 353: Figure 4-25 Installing The Gpz-4Cotf Or Gpz-4Cotf-A Daughter Board

    Issue 10.0 GPZ-4COTF or GPZ-4COTF-A (4 Loop and Ground Start Interface Daughter Board) Figure 4-25 Installing the GPZ-4COTF or GPZ-4COTF-A Daughter Board 5.2.1 Description The GPZ-4COTF or GPZ-4COTF-A daughter board provides: Four analog loop start/ground start trunk circuits  Four Caller ID Circuits ...

  • Page 354: Table 4-30 Gpz-4Cotf Or Gpz-4Cotf-A Rj-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs

    Issue 10.0 ❍ When using the GPZ-4COTF or GPZ-4COTF-A daughter board for ground start trunks, the PBX ground must be connected as described in Chapter 3, section 3.3.3 Install CAUTION Grounding on 19” Chassis on page 3-19 for the trunks to function correctly.
  • Page 355 Issue 10.0 Table 4-30 GPZ-4COTF or GPZ-4COTF-A RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-61 Cable Connector CN2, Trunks – Connecting to GCD-4COTB/GCD-4COTB-A Blade The CN2 connector is polarity sensitive (tip-to-tip, ring-to-ring) Pin No. Connection Circuit 8 – Tip Circuit 7 – Tip Circuit 6 –...

  • Page 356: Figure 4-26 Gcd-2Bria Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-2BRIA (2 Basic Rate Interface) Figure 4-26 GCD-2BRIA Blade 5.3.1 Description This unit is an interface unit that accommodates an ISDN (Basic Rate) circuit. 4-76 Installing the SV9100 Blades...
  • Page 357 Issue 10.0 The BRI blade provides: Two (GCD-2BRIA) 2-Channel Circuits (2B + D) configured as T-Bus  64Kb/s Clear B-Channel and 16Kb/s D-Channel  Two Status LEDs  Connector for GPZ-2BRIA  These trunk circuits can be connected to either ISDN trunks or ISDN telephones, depending on the switch setting in system programming.

  • Page 358: Table 4-31 Gcd-2Bria Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 Connect the cable from the NT1 Network Termination cable to the CN7 or CN8 connector on the GCD-2BRIA blade and/or GPZ-2BRIA daughter board. (Refer to Figure 4-26 GCD-2BRIA Blade on page 4-76 for the location of the connectors on the blade.) 5.3.3 LED Indications LED indications for the GCD-2BRIA are listed in...

  • Page 359: Table 4-32 Gcd-2Bria Rj-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs

    Issue 10.0 5.3.4 Connectors Table 4-32 GCD-2BRIA RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs show the pin-outs for the RJ-61 cable connector for T-Bus connections. Figure 4-26 GCD-2BRIA Blade on page 4-76 shows the location of the connectors on the GCD-2BRIA blade. Table 4-32 GCD-2BRIA RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-61 Cable Connector –...
  • Page 360 All ISDN telephone circuits [#1-2 (BRI blade) and #3-4 (with the BRI daughter board)] are supplied DC power from the UNIVERGE SV9100 system. System programming must be used to block new calls on the blade. This program prevents new calls from being established on the blade, but does not terminate any existing call.

  • Page 361: Figure 4-27 Installing The Gpz-2Bria Daughter Board

    Issue 10.0 Refer to the following tables for maximum upgrade capacities of the GPZ-2BRIA daughter board: Table 2-6 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG  Chassis on page 2-13 Table 2-7 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG B and  CHS2UG E Chassis on page 2-15 5.4.2 Installation...
  • Page 362 Issue 10.0 Table 4-33 GPZ-2BRIA RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-61 Cable Connector – CN7, CN8 T-Bus Connection Pin No. Connection — — — — 4-82 Installing the SV9100 Blades...

  • Page 363: Figure 4-28 Gcd-4Diopa Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-4DIOPA (DID/OPX Interface) Figure 4-28 GCD-4DIOPA Blade 5.5.1 Description The GCD-4DIOPA supports the analog DID and single line telephone interface functions (such as Off-Premise Extension). The function type is assigned in programming for each port. The circuit types, however, should be grouped together.

  • Page 364: Table 4-34 Gcd-4Diopa Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 The GCD-4DIOPA provides: Four DID trunk circuits or four OPX circuits  Two Blade status LEDs  -48VDC  Refer to the following tables for maximum upgrade capacities of the GCD-4DIOPA blade: Table 2-6 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG ...

  • Page 365: Table 4-35 Gcd-4Diopa Rj-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs

    Issue 10.0 Table 4-34 GCD-4DIOPA LED Indications (Continued) LED Indication Operation Status Remarks Live LED Busy LED (Red) (Green) A Channel is busy (use – Unit Busy another from CH1 ~ CHx). All channels are idle. – Flash 80ms (On/ Downloading firmware.

  • Page 366: Figure 4-29 Gcd-Prta Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-PRTA (T1/E1/ISDN PRI Interface) Figure 4-29 GCD-PRTA Blade 5.6.1 Description The GCD-PRTA T1/E1/ISDN PRI blade provides an interface for T1/E1 and ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) applications. This blade has a single 24-channel 64Kb per second digital signal circuit that can be configured for either T1 trunks or PRI.
  • Page 367 Issue 10.0 If set for T1, the PRTA blade provides 24 trunks in a single universal slot. These trunks can be one of the following: Loop Start  Ground Start   E&M Trunks  ANI/DNIS E&M Trunks  T1 provides advanced digital trunking and conserves universal slots. For example, a system with 12 loop start trunks, two tie lines and six DID trunks uses up to five universal slots.

  • Page 368: Figure 4-30 Pri Layout For Nt-1 Network

    Issue 10.0 5.6.2 Installation To install the GCD-PRTA: Plug the GCD-PRTA into any universal slot in the chassis. Use Program 10-51-01 (PRI/T1/E1) to set the GCD-PRTA blade to either PRI, T1 or E1. With normal operation, LED 1 flashes green. NOTE Connect the cable from the NT1 Network Termination cable to the CN2 connector on the GCD-PRTA.

  • Page 369: Table 4-36 Gcd-Prta Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 5.6.3 LED Indications LED indications for the GCD-PRTA are listed in Table 4-36 GCD-PRTA Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-29 GCD-PRTA Blade on page 4-86 for the location of the LEDs on the blade.

  • Page 370: Figure 4-31 Gcd-Prta Led Indication Pattern Of Layer 1 On T1 Unit

    Issue 10.0 Refer to Figure 4-31 GCD-PRTA LED Indication Pattern of Layer 1 on T1 Unit for LED pattern information. LED indications for the T1 are listed in Table 4-37 T1 LED Indications. Figure 4-31 GCD-PRTA LED Indication Pattern of Layer 1 on T1 Unit Table 4-37 T1 LED Indications Alarm Details of the Alarm...

  • Page 371: Table 4-38 Gcd-Prta Rj-45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs

    Issue 10.0 5.6.4 Connectors Table 4-38 GCD-PRTA RJ-45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs shows the pin-outs for the T-Bus RJ-45 connections. Figure 4-29 GCD-PRTA Blade on page 4-86 shows the location of the connectors on the PRT blade. Table 4-38 GCD-PRTA RJ-45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-45 Cable Connector –...

  • Page 372: Figure 4-32 Gcd-4Odta Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-4ODTA (4-Port Tie Line Interface Blade) Figure 4-32 GCD-4ODTA Blade 4-92 Installing the SV9100 Blades...
  • Page 373 SG terminal of the router or multiplexer must be connected to the FG grounding terminal on the CAUTION UNIVERGE SV9100 chassis. When a tie line trunk is connected, the FG terminal must be connected to the ground. If the FG terminal is not connected correctly, the signal may fail.

  • Page 374: Table 4-40 Gcd-4Odta Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 5.7.3 LED Indications LED indications for the GCD-4ODTA are listed in Table 4-40 GCD-4ODTA Indications. Each LED is listed with its associated function and LED and Operational status. Refer to Figure 4-32 GCD-4ODTA Blade on page 4-92 for the location of the LEDs on the blade.
  • Page 375 Issue 10.0 Table 4-41 GCD-4ODTA RJ-61 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-61 Cable Connector – 2-Wire E&M, CN1A~CN1D Pin No. Connection Description — Not Used Control signal to trunk — Not Used Voice signal both ways Voice signal both ways — Not Used Control signal from trunk —...

  • Page 376: Figure 4-33 Voice Signal Connection For Type I And V

    Issue 10.0 5.7.5 Connections Figure 4-33 Voice Signal Connection for Type I And V Figure 4-34 Control Signal Connection on page 4-97 show the signaling methods for circuit types. Figure 4-33 Voice Signal Connection for Type I And V 4-96 Installing the SV9100 Blades...

  • Page 377: Figure 4-34 Control Signal Connection

    Issue 10.0 Figure 4-34 Control Signal Connection SV9100 System Hardware Manual 4-97...

  • Page 378: Figure 4-35 Gcd-Vm00 Blade

    Battery Socket 6.1.1 Description This blade is a PC platform installed in the UNIVERGE SV9100 that contains data storage for voice recording and application software supporting a maximum of 16 ports. A digital signal processor/voice processing section handles the following...

  • Page 379: Figure 4-36 Install The Cr-2032 Battery

    Issue 10.0 Two USB 1.0 ports for USB keyboard support, database backup and  software upgrades One 15-pin VGA connector for VHA monitor support  6.1.2 Installation Only one GCD-VM00 can be installed per system. Handle the CF drive carefully. To prevent damage, do not ❍...

  • Page 380: Figure 4-37 Install The So-Dimm Memory

    Issue 10.0 Figure 4-37 Install the SO-DIMM Memory Install the Compact Flash drive into slot CN7, make sure the drive is fully seated in the slot (refer to Figure 4-38 Install the Compact Flash Drive). Figure 4-38 Install the Compact Flash Drive 6.1.3 LED Indications 6.1.3.1...

  • Page 381: Application Led - Red/Green (Dual Color)

    Issue 10.0 6.1.3.2 Busy LED – Red The Busy LED is controlled by the DSP and indicates the port status. Off: Power off or idle.  On: Reset.  6.1.3.3 Application LED – Red/Green (Dual Color) The Application LED is controlled by the DSP indicates the APSU state of the software running on the Off: Power off.

  • Page 382: Figure 4-39 Straight Rj-11 Pin Out

    Issue 10.0 6.1.4.3 Straight RJ-11 Pin Out Figure 4-39 Straight RJ-11 Pin Out 6.1.4.4 USB Interface APSU provides two USB interfaces that can be used for the following devices: USB Keyboard  USB Memory Device  6.1.4.5 VGA Display Interface APSU card provides a VGA display interface through a standard DB-15 connector.

  • Page 383: Table 4-42 Ethernet Connector Pin-Out

    Issue 10.0 The RJ-45 connector pin-out is shown in Table 4-42 Ethernet Connector Pin-Out. Table 4-42 Ethernet Connector Pin-Out View Pin No. Signal Note PIN1 ---- PIN8 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX port (RJ-45 connector) SV9100 System Hardware Manual 4-103...

  • Page 384: Figure 4-40 Gcd-Pvaa Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-PVAA (Packet Voice Application) Figure 4-40 GCD-PVAA Blade 6.2.1 Description The Packet Voice Application, GCD-PVAA blade is an optional interface that supports the Application Package PVA PMS. This blade can be assigned as an IVR package to support the Interactive Voice Response Application supporting a maximum of 16 ports or as a PMS application to support Hotel/Motel PMS integration.
  • Page 385 Issue 10.0 Basic Support Package Each blade installed with the Interactive Voice Response Application (IVR) accounts for up to 16 Extension Ports of the Total Port capacity (One PVA IVR blade maximum). If used for PMS (PVA PMS) no ports are used. Refer to the following tables for maximum upgrade capacities of the GCD-PVAA blade: Table 2-6 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities –...
  • Page 386 Issue 10.0 Slow Flash: Board is running but not in sync with the chassis  Fast Flash: Board is in sync with the chassis and operating normally  Busy LED – Red On: Application problem  CompactFlash Card Activity LED – Red CompactFlash Card Activity LED is controlled by the IDE controller ...

  • Page 387: Figure 4-41 Gcd-Ccta Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-CCTA (CCIS Trunk Interface) Figure 4-41 GCD-CCTA Blade 6.3.1 Description The Common Channel Handler Interface blade is a digital trunk ETU that terminates FT1 trunks (up to 24 DS-0 channels) providing a common channel signal interface. The GCD-CCTA (Common Channel Handler) is an optional blade that provides a common channel signal through the GCD-CCTA to a K-CCIS network and controls the signaling between the KTS and the CP00.

  • Page 388: Table 4-43 Gcd-Ccta Led Indications

    Issue 10.0 The T1 interface has a single 24 channel 64kb/s digital signal circuit which can be configured either for T1 trunking. Refer to the following tables for maximum upgrade capacities of the GCD-CCTA blade: Table 2-6 SV9100 Maximum Blade Capacities – CHS2UG Chassis ...

  • Page 389: Figure 4-42 Gcd-Ccta Led Indication Pattern Of Layer 1 On T1 Unit

    Issue 10.0 Figure 4-42 GCD-CCTA LED Indication Pattern of Layer 1 on T1 Unit 6.3.4 Connectors Table 4-44 GCD-CCTA RJ-45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs shows the pin-outs for the RJ-45 connector. Figure 4-41 GCD-CCTA Blade on page 4-107 shows the location of the connectors on the GCD-CCTA blade. Table 4-44 GCD-CCTA RJ-45 Cable Connector Pin-Outs RJ-45 Cable Connector –...

  • Page 390: Figure 4-43 Gcd-Rga Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-RGA (Application Gateway) Figure 4-43 GCD-RGA Blade Reset Busy LED Active LED 6.4.1 Description The GCD-RGA blade is a 4-port switch and router which complies with the Ethernet specification for 10 Base-T, 100 Base-TX and 1000 Base-TX. This blade is compatible in LAN applications using 10Mbps, 100Mbps and 1000Mbs.
  • Page 391 Issue 10.0 Quality of Service (QOS):  DiffServ  802.1p  802.1Q  Traffic Shaping for Upstream and Downstream traffic  Firewall:  Denial of Service (DoS) Protection  Black WAN Ping Requests  Multicast Pass Through  VPN Pass Through ...
  • Page 392  The VoIPDB is required for IP telephones to communicate with non-VoIP UNIVERGE SV9100 telephones, and to place or receive outside calls, must be connected to either an external switching hub or to the Router blade. ugs into a universal slot and does not consume GCD-RGA blade pl any port unless the conference application is licensed.

  • Page 393: Table 4-45 Gcd-Rga Status Leds

    Issue 10.0 6.4.3 Switch Settings The Reset Switch allows the technician to: Initialize Factory Defaults: Hold the reset button (PB) for five seconds  during a power-on of the GCD-RGA. Reset the GCD-RGA: While GCD-RGA is running hold the reset ...

  • Page 394: Table 4-46 Gcd-Rga Ethernet Connector Pin-Outs

    Issue 10.0 Busy/App LED – Red/Green The Busy/App LED is controlled by the main processor and indicates the port status. The LED has red/green capability. Reset or main processor boot problem: red solid on, green solid on  (orange). Main processor booting: solid green. ...

  • Page 395: Figure 4-44 Gcd-Etia Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-ETIA (Gigabit PoE Switch) Figure 4-44 GCD-ETIA Blade 6.5.1 Description The GCD-ETIA blade is a managed 8-port gigabit Ethernet PoE switch. Ports 1 and 8 are the default uplink ports. All the user management and stacking are based on this setup. This blade provides: Base-TX Base-T 8 Gigabit Ethernet (10 Base-T/100...

  • Page 396: Stacking Architecture

    Issue 10.0 Port Mirroring  802.3x Flow Control  Independent VLAN Learning Support  TCP/IP Networking Stack  Multi-Unit Stacking (multiple blades in a system are managed from  the same user interface) Dynamic PoE Control (allows setting the proper PoE classifications ...

  • Page 397: Group Formation

    Issue 10.0 6.5.2.2 GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 IP Address Assignment The GSWU Main board is provided with an IP address from the back plane CPU during the initialization sequence. The provision of an IP address from the back plane identifies the Main board.

  • Page 398: Unmanaged Switch Functions

    The grouping of the three GSWU units to form a 20 port switch is restricted to reside in a single system location. The grouping is not allowed where the GSWU units are placed as part of the NetLink feature in the Univerge SV9100 system. 6.5.2.5 Unmanaged Switch Functions...

  • Page 399: Figure 4-45 Gcd-Svr2 Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-SVR2 (Server Blade) Figure 4-45 GCD-SVR2 Blade SODIMM VGA Monitor SSD Active LED 10/100/1000 LAN LEDs LAN LEDs App1 LED App2 LED Power LED 10/100/1000 Battery Shutdown/Startup 6.6.1 Description The Server is a customized single board computer, with a solid state hard drive (SSD) and memory module.
  • Page 400 Issue 10.0 Ethernet: Two 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet RJ45  ports USB: Four USB 2.0 ports  Shutdown Button: This is a momentary push button switch for a  graceful shutdown of the GCD-SVR2. (It is also used for restarting the GCD-SVR2). LEDs: Four Front Panel indicators ...

  • Page 401: Table 4-48 Gcd-Svr2 Eth 0/Eth 1 Connector Pin-Outs

    Issue 10.0 6.6.3 LED Indications 6.6.3.1 Power LED Power LED Indicates power is present. 6.6.3.2 Application1 and Application 2 LEDs Application1 and 2 LEDs are for use by the Application. Each Application (UCB, Desktop Suite, etc.) defines their use and meaning.
  • Page 402 Issue 10.0 Table 4-48 GCD-SVR2 ETH 0/ETH 1 Connector Pin-Outs ETH 0/ETH 1 Connector Pin No. 10/100 1000 BI_DA+ BI_DA- BI_DB+ BI_DC+ BI_DC- BI_DB- BI_DD+ BI_DD- 4-122 Installing the SV9100 Blades...

  • Page 403: Figure 4-46 Gcd-Svr3 Blade

    Issue 10.0 GCD-SVR3 (Server Blade) Figure 4-46 GCD-SVR3 Blade USB 3.0 Port Mini Display Port 10/100/1000 LAN LEDs 10/100/1000 USB 2.0 USB 2.0 App1 LED App2 LED SSD Activity Power LED Shutdown/Startup Switches Battery J_CMOS1 6.7.1 Description The GCD-SVR3 is a customized server board for the SV9100 system. Depending on the installed applications and licensing, the GCD-SVR3 can support various high end features such as Unified Communications, Voice Mail, Conference Bridge, etc.
  • Page 404 Issue 10.0 Ethernet: Two 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T RJ45 ports  USB: One USB 3.0 port, four USB 2.0 ports  Shutdown Button: This is a momentary push button switch for a  graceful shutdown of the GCD-SVR3. (It is also used for restarting the GCD-SVR3).

  • Page 405: Battery Removal

    Issue 10.0 6.7.3 Remove and Replace the Battery The GCD-SVR3 blade must be shut down before removal from the chassis. If the blade is removed from the chassis without first being properly shut down, damage could occur or data files could WARNING potentially be corrupted.

  • Page 406: Ethernet Port Leds

    GCD-SVR3 to your monitor. There are various options, such Mini DP to full size DP adapter dongle or cable (available for  purchase from NEC Corporation of America). Mini DP to VGA adapter dongle or cable (available for  purchase from NEC Corporation of America).

  • Page 407: Table 4-49 Gcd-Svr3 Eth 0/Eth 1 Connector Pin-Outs

    Issue 10.0 6.7.5.3 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T Ethernet Interface The GCD-SVR3 blade provides two 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/ 1000 Base-T Ethernet ports (RJ-45 connectors) labeled as ETH 0 and ETH 1. Table 4-49 GCD-SVR3 ETH 0/ETH 1 Connector Pin-Outs on page 4-127 shows the pin-outs for the RJ-45 connector.

  • Page 408: Connection Requirements

    Wiring Between the Chassis and the MDF 7.3.1 Chassis Cables The chassis is equipped with two MDF Cable Assemblies. NEC recommends that the MDF Cable Assembly be used to connect the multiline terminals, single line telephones (except PFT), PVAA and DID/ OPX lines.

  • Page 409: Table 4-50 Mdf Cable Colors

    Issue 10.0 Table 4-50 MDF Cable Colors Cable Colors Outs BR–WH GN–RD BR–BK BL–YL SL–YL BR–VI GN–WH OR–RD BL–BK SL–BK BR–YL GN–VI OR–WH BL–RD SL–RD BR–GN GN–YL OR–VI WH–BL WH–SL RD–BR BK–GN YL–OR VI–BL BL–WH SL–WH BR–RD GN–BK OR–YL BL–VI WH–OR RD–BL RD–SL...
  • Page 410 Issue 10.0 Table 4-51 MDF Cable Connections (Station) (Continued) Statio DLCA LCA/LCF Connecto Runnin g Cable Cable DLCA COTB RD–BR TA–1 BR–RD TB–1 RD–SL RA–1 SL–RD RB–1 BK–BL TA–2 BL–BK TB–2 BK–OR RA–2 OR–BK RB–2 BK–GN TA–1 GN–BK TB–1 BK–BR RA–1 BR–BK RB–1...
  • Page 411 Issue 10.0 Table 4-52 MDF Cable Connections (Trunk) Stati COTB DIOPA PRTA Runni Connect Cable Cable WH– TA– BL– TB– WH– – – RA– – OR– RB– WH– TA– – – – GN– TB– WH– – – RA– – – –...
  • Page 412 Issue 10.0 Table 4-52 MDF Cable Connections (Trunk) (Continued) Stati COTB DIOPA PRTA Runni Connect Cable Cable RD– TA– BR– TB– RD–SL – – RA– – SL–RD RB– BK–BL TA– BL–BK – – – TB– BK– – – RA– – –...
  • Page 413 Issue 10.0 Table 4-52 MDF Cable Connections (Trunk) (Continued) Stati COTB DIOPA PRTA Runni Connect Cable Cable YL–OR TA– OR–YL TB– YL–GN – – RA– – GN–YL RB– YL–BR TA– BR–YL – – – TB– YL–SL – – RA– – SL–YL –...

  • Page 414: Outside Lines

    Issue 10.0 7.3.2 Outside Lines An RJ-61 connector is authorized by the FCC for connection of CO lines. The lines are connected in sequence in this termination block. Therefore, the lines must be ordered in the appearance order best suited to the user. Refer to Table 4-51 MDF Cable Connections (Station) on page 4-129 Table 4-52 MDF Cable Connections (Trunk) on page 4-131...

  • Page 415: Table 5-1 Terminal Category Reference Chart

    UNIVERGE ® SV9100 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Chapter 5 Terminals and Single Line Telephones ECTION ENERAL ESCRIPTION This chapter provides information about the DT series Digital and IP terminals in addition to the single line telephones, cordless telephones and wireless telephones. Only the DT series, single line telephones, cordless telephones and wireless telephones discussed in the document can be installed on the SV9100 system.
  • Page 416 Issue 10.0 Table 5-1 Terminal Category Reference Chart (Continued) Series Name Equipment ID Comments DT400 Series DT410 DTZ-2E-( ) Economical terminal providing access to basic telephony and messaging  service Digital DTZ-6DE-( ) Fully functional keypad providing standard business functions such as hold, ...
  • Page 417 ITL-320C-( ) IP terminal provides a 5” color touch panel  Features of the telephone provide easy use of NEC Unified communications  and third-party telephony XML applications Access to 32 telephony feature lines across an IP backbone, built-in full duplex ...
  • Page 418 Issue 10.0 Table 5-1 Terminal Category Reference Chart (Continued) Series Name Equipment ID Comments DT800 Series DT820 ITY-6D-( ) 6-button terminal equipped with LCD and full-featured keypad  8-button Self-Labeling LCD telephone IP Terminals ITY-8LDX-( )  All DT 820s come with a standard backlit LCD display, full duplex speakerphone ITY-8LCGX-( ) ...
  • Page 419 Issue 10.0 Table 5-1 Terminal Category Reference Chart (Continued) Series Name Equipment ID Comments DT900 Series DT920 ITK-6D-( ) Economical terminal providing access to basic telephony and messaging  service IP Terminals ITK-12D-( ) 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX network interface  1000 Base-T network interface for G model ...
  • Page 420 Issue 10.0 Table 5-2 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT300/DT700), Table 5-3 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT400/DT800) on page 5-7 Table 5-4 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT500/DT900) on page 5-8 show the compatibility between the terminals and adapters used in the system. Table 5-2 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT300/DT700) Adapter Unit Terminal...
  • Page 421 Issue 10.0 Table 5-2 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT300/DT700) (Continued) Adapter Unit Terminal ADA-L APR-L ILPA PSA-L BCH-L BHA-L GBA-L IPv6-L — = Option Not Available  = Optional Available = When the ILPA-R is connected to a 12CG/12DG terminal, maximum connection speed drops to 100Mbps. = The 12CG/12DG terminals support Gigabit Ethernet, GBA-L Unit not required.
  • Page 422 Issue 10.0 Table 5-4 Terminal and Adapter Compatibility (DT500/DT900) Adapter Unit Terminal ADA-L APR-L Digital Terminals: DT500   DTK-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL   DTK-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL IP Terminals: DT900 — — ITK-6D-1 (BK) TEL ITK-6DG-1 (BK) TEL — — —...

  • Page 423: Table 5-5 Firmware Compatibility Matrix

    Issue 10.0 Table 5-5 Firmware Compatibility Matrix BCH-L Unit Lot Number xxxDxx or lower xxxExx or higher Terminal xxx I xx or lower Supported Supported (Version 8.10 and 1, E0 or lower) Number Not supported Supported xxxJxx or higher DT-330 (Version 2.20 or higher) ...

  • Page 424: Table 5-7 Terminal And Line Key/Lcd Compatibility (Dt300/Dt700)

    Issue 10.0 Table 5-7 Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility (DT300/DT700) Table 5-8 Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility (DT400/DT800) on page 5-11 show the compatibility between the terminals and Line Key or LCD used in the system. Table 5-7 Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility (DT300/DT700) Line Key/LCD Terminal 8 LK-L...
  • Page 425 Issue 10.0 Table 5-8 Terminal and Line Key/LCD Compatibility (DT400/DT800) Line Key/LCD Terminal 8 LK-Z 16LK-Z DCL-60 Digital Terminals: DT400 — — — DTZ-2E-3 (BK) TEL DTZ-6DE-3 (BK) TEL — — — DTZ-12D-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL  —   — ...

  • Page 426: Table 5-9 Terminal And Ten Key Kit Compatibility (Dt300/Dt700)

    Issue 10.0 Table 5-9 Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility (DT300/DT700) Table 5-10 Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility (DT400/DT800) on page 5-13 show the compatibility between the terminals and Ten Key kits used in the system. Table 5-9 Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility (DT300/DT700) Ten Key Kit Terminal BS (Braille)-...
  • Page 427 Issue 10.0 Table 5-9 Terminal and Ten Key Kit Compatibility (DT300/DT700) (Continued) Ten Key Kit Terminal BS (Braille)- BS(F)-L BS(S)-L BS(Retro)-l (S-Hotel) — = Option Not Available  = Optional Available The BS (Braille)-L KIT kit consists of stickers to be installed. ...

  • Page 428: Table 5-11 Terminal And Optional Equipment Compatibility (Dt300/Dt700)

    Issue 10.0 Table 5-11 Terminal and Optional Equipment Compatibility (DT300/DT700) on page 5-14 Table 5-12 Terminal and Optional Equipment Compatibility (DT400/DT800) on page 5-15 show the compatibility between the terminals and optional equipment used in the system. Table 5-11 Terminal and Optional Equipment Compatibility (DT300/DT700) Equipment Terminal PSA-L...
  • Page 429 Issue 10.0 Table 5-11 Terminal and Optional Equipment Compatibility (DT300/DT700) (Continued) Equipment Terminal PSA-L  1 PANEL-L WM-L ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-320C-2 (BK) TEL    Console: — —  DCL-60-1 (BK)/(WH) CONSOLE  — = Option Not Available = Optional Available ...
  • Page 430 Issue 10.0 Table 5-12 Terminal and Optional Equipment Compatibility (DT400/DT800) (Continued) Equipment Terminal  1 PANEL-L WM-L Console: —  DCZ-60-2 (BK)/(WH) CONSOLE  — = Option Not Available = Optional Available   1 The WM-L is required if the ADA-L UNIT or APR-L UNIT is installed on the telephone.

  • Page 431: Dt300 Series Digital Multiline Terminals

    Issue 10.0 DT300/DT400/DT500 S ECTION ERIES IGITAL ULTILINE ERMINALS The DT300/DT400/DT500 Series offers a new exciting line up of digital telephones. These telephones (except economy), have a modular design that allows the telephone to be upgraded and customized. Optional LCD panels, dial pads, feature key kits, handset cradles, face plates and colored side panels can easily be snapped on and off to upgrade and customize as the customer desires.

  • Page 432: Figure 5-2 Dtl-6De-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.1.2 DTL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL This digital economy multiline terminal has six line keys with display and is available in black only. The terminal features: Non-modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Half-duplex speaker phone  Six line keys (Red, Green) ...

  • Page 433: Figure 5-3 Dtl-12E-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.1.3 DTL-12E-1 (BK) TEL This digital economy non-display multiline terminal has 12 programmable line keys and is available in black only. The terminal features: Non-modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Half-duplex speaker phone  12 line keys (Red, Green) ...

  • Page 434: Figure 5-4 Dtl-8Ld-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.1.4 DTL-8LD (BK)/(WH) TEL This digital value multiline terminal has eight line keys with display and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  Eight line keys (Red, Green) ...

  • Page 435: Figure 5-5 Dtl-12Bt-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.1.5 DTL-12BT-1 (BK) TEL This digital value multiline terminal has 12 line keys and is available in black only. The terminal features: Keyset-like Handset  12 Line Buttons  Function Button  Dial Button  Display  multiline terminal functions with Main Unit ...

  • Page 436: Figure 5-6 Dtl-12D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.1.6 DTL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL This digital value multiline terminal has 12 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  12 line keys (Red, Green) ...

  • Page 437: Figure 5-7 Dtl-12Pa-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.1.7 DTL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL This digital value multiline terminal with Analog Power Failure adapter has 12 line keys and is available in black only. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  12 line keys (Red, Green) ...

  • Page 438: Figure 5-8 Dtl-24D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.1.8 DTL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL This digital value multiline terminal has 24 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  24 line keys (Red, Green) ...

  • Page 439: Figure 5-9 Dtl-32D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.1.9 DTL-32D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL This digital value multiline terminal has 32 line keys (24 line keys plus eight line key LK Unit) and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base ...

  • Page 440: Figure 5-10 Dtz-2E-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 DT400 Series Digital Multiline Terminals 2.2.1 DTZ-2E-3 (BK) TEL This digital economy non-display multiline terminal has two programmable line keys and is available in black only. The terminal features: Non-modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Half-duplex speaker phone ...

  • Page 441: Figure 5-11 Dtz-6De-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.2.2 DTZ-6DE-3 (BK) TEL This digital economy multiline terminal has six line keys with display and is available in black only. The terminal features: Non-modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Half-duplex speaker phone  Six line keys (Red, Green) ...

  • Page 442: Figure 5-12 Dtz-12D-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.2.3 DTZ-12D-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL This digital value multiline terminal has 12 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  12 line keys (Red, Green) ...

  • Page 443: Figure 5-13 Dtz-24D-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.2.4 DTZ-24D-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL This digital value multiline terminal has 24 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  24 line keys (Red, Green) ...

  • Page 444: Figure 5-14 Dtz-8Ld-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.2.5 DTZ-8LD-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL This digital value multiline terminal has eight line keys with display and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  Eight line keys (Red, Green) ...

  • Page 445: Figure 5-15 Dtk-12D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 DT500 Series Digital Multiline Terminals The DT500 terminals have a newly designed cosmetic face, new layout button and a five-step adjustable tilt base. 2.3.1 DTK-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL This digital multiline terminal has 12 line keys and is available in both black and white.

  • Page 446: Figure 5-16 Dtk-24D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 2.3.2 DTK-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL This digital multiline terminal has 24 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Fully functional keypad providing standard business functions such  as hold, transfer, speaker, microphone and other features 168 X 58 dot matrix LCD ...

  • Page 447: Figure 5-17 Itl-2E-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 DT700/DT800/DT900 S IP M ECTION ERIES ULTILINE ERMINALS The DT700/DT800/DT900 offers a new exciting line up of IP telephones. These telephones (except economy), have a modular design that allows the telephones to be upgraded and customized. Optional LCD panels, dial pads, feature key kits, handset cradles, face plates and colored side panels can easily be snapped on and off to upgrade and customize as the customer desires.

  • Page 448: Figure 5-18 Itl-6De-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.1.2 ITL-6DE-1 (BK) TEL This IP economy multiline terminal has six line keys with display and is available in black only. The terminal features: Non-modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Remote login and maintenance  Full-duplex speaker phone ...

  • Page 449: Figure 5-19 Itl-8Lde-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.1.3 ITL-8LDE-1 (BK) TEL This IP economy multiline terminal has eight line keys with display and is available in black only. The terminal features: Non-Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  line key displays eight lines. Self-Labeling ...

  • Page 450: Figure 5-20 Itl-8Ld-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.1.4 ITL-8LD-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has eight line keys with display and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  line key displays eight lines per page (four pages of eight Self-Labeling ...

  • Page 451: Figure 5-21 Itl-12D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.1.5 ITL-12D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has 12 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  Protection button  Seven-color LED for incoming calls ...

  • Page 452: Figure 5-22 Itl-12Cg-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.1.6 ITL-12CG-3 (BK) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has 12 line keys and is available in black only. The terminal features: USB Connection (USB 2.0, 5V/500mA supply)  Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone ...

  • Page 453: Figure 5-23 Itl-12Dg-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.1.7 ITL-12DG-3 (BK) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has 12 line keys and is available in black only. The terminal features: USB Connection (USB 2.0, 5V/500mA supply)  Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone ...

  • Page 454: Figure 5-24 Itl-12Pa-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.1.8 ITL-12PA-1 (BK) TEL This IP value multiline terminal with Analog Power Failure adapter has 12 line keys and is available in black only. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  Protection button ...

  • Page 455: Figure 5-25 Itl-24D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.1.9 ITL-24D-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has 24 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  Protection button  Seven-color LED for incoming calls ...

  • Page 456: Figure 5-26 Itl-32D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.1.10 ITL-32D-1 (BK/WH) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has 32 line keys (24 line keys plus an eight line key LK Unit) and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base ...

  • Page 457: Figure 5-27 Itl-320C-1 Tel/Itl-320C-2 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.1.11 ITL-320C-1 (BK) TEL/ITL-320C-2 (BK) TEL This IP multiline terminal features a large color touch panel LCD and is available in black only. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex speaker phone  Protection button ...

  • Page 458: Figure 5-28 Ity-6D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 DT800 Series IP Multiline Terminals 3.2.1 ITY-6D-1 (BK) TEL This IP entry multiline terminal has six line keys with display and is available in black only. The terminal features: Non-modular design  Two-step adjustable base  Two-color LED for Incoming calls ...

  • Page 459: Figure 5-29 Ity-8Ldx-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.2.2 ITY-8LDX-1 (BK) TEL This IP entry multiline terminal has eight line keys with display and is available in black only. The terminal features: Non-modular design  Two-step adjustable base  Two-color LED for Incoming calls  168 x 128 monochrome LCD with cursor keys ...

  • Page 460: Figure 5-30 Ity-8Lcgx-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.2.3 ITY-8LGCX-1 (BK) TEL This IP entry multiline terminal has eight line keys with color display and is available in black only. The terminal features: Non-modular design  Two-step adjustable base  Two-color LED for Incoming calls  320 x 240 color LCD with cursor keys ...

  • Page 461: Figure 5-31 Itz-8Ld-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.2.4 ITZ-8LD-3 (BK) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has eight line keys with display and is available in black. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Full-duplex hands-free operation  Self-Labeling line key displays eight lines per page (four pages of ...

  • Page 462: Figure 5-32 Itz-12D-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.2.5 ITZ-12D-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has 12 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Seven-color LED for incoming calls  224 X 96 full dot gray scale LCD with cursor keys ...

  • Page 463: Figure 5-33 Itz-12Cg-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.2.6 ITZ-12CG-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has 12 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Seven-color LED for incoming calls  Color LCD ...

  • Page 464: Figure 5-34 Itz-12Dg-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.2.7 ITZ-12DG-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has 12 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Seven-color LED for incoming calls  Monochrome LCD ...

  • Page 465: Figure 5-35 Itz-24D-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.2.8 ITZ-24D-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has 24 line keys and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Seven-color LED for incoming calls  224 X 96 full dot gray scale LCD with cursor keys ...

  • Page 466: Figure 5-36 Itz-8Ldg-3 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.2.9 ITZ-8LDG-3 (BK)/(WH) TEL This IP value multiline terminal has eight line keys with display and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Modular design  Four-step adjustable base  Seven-color LED for incoming calls ...

  • Page 467: Figure 5-37 Itk-6D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 DT900 Series IP Multiline Terminals The DT900 terminals have a newly designed cosmetic face, new layout button and a five-step adjustable tilt base. 3.3.1 ITK-6D-1 (BK) TEL This IP multiline terminal has six buttons with display and is available in black only.

  • Page 468: Figure 5-38 Itk-12D-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.3.2 ITK-12D-1 (BK) TEL This IP multiline terminal has 12 buttons with display and is available in black only. The terminal features: Fully functional keypad providing standard business functions such  as hold, transfer, speaker, microphone and other features 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX network interface ...

  • Page 469: Figure 5-39 Itk-8Lcx-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.3.3 ITK-8LCX-1 (BK) TEL This IP multiline terminal has 8 line keys with display and is available in black only. The terminal features: Self-labeling line key displays 8 line keys  Fully functional keypad providing standard business functions such ...

  • Page 470: Figure 5-40 Itk-8Tcgx-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.3.4 ITK-8TCGX-1 (BK) TEL This IP multiline terminal has 8 line keys with color display and is available in black only. The terminal features: Fully functional keypad providing standard business functions such  as hold, transfer, speaker, microphone and other features 1000 Base-T network interface ...
  • Page 471 Issue 10.0 Regulatory Information for Bluetooth Interface USA: NOTICE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

  • Page 472: Figure 5-41 Itk-24Cg-1 Tel

    Issue 10.0 3.3.5 ITK-24CG-1 (BK)/(WH) TEL This IP multiline terminal has 24 line keys with display and is available in both black and white. The terminal features: Fully functional keypad providing standard business functions such  as hold, transfer, speaker, microphone and other features 1000 Base-T network interface ...

  • Page 473: Connecting The Handset

    Issue 10.0 ECTION NSTALL ULTILINE ERMINALS Connecting the DT300/DT400/DT500 Series Multiline Terminal to the System This instruction applies to all DT300/DT400/DT500 series multiline terminals. 4.1.1 Connecting the Handset on the bottom of the Confirm the location of the handset connector multiline terminal.

  • Page 474: Figure 5-43 Installing The Handset (Dt400)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-43 Installing the Handset (DT400) 4.1.1.3 Handset Connection DT500 Install the modular plug (attached to the curl cord of the handset) into the handset connector at the back of terminal. Push until it snaps into place. Lead the Handset cable through the applicable groove. Refer to Figure 5-44 Installing the Handset (DT500).

  • Page 475: Figure 5-45 Installing The Line Cord (Dt300)

    Issue 10.0 4.1.2.1 Line Cord Connection DT300 Install the modular plug of the Line Cord into the Line Connector at the back of terminal. Push until it snaps into place. Refer to Figure 5-45 Installing the Line Cord (DT300). Figure 5-45 Installing the Line Cord (DT300) Install the Line Cord in the groove.
  • Page 476 Issue 10.0 Figure 5-47 Line Cord Groove Back of Terminal (DT300) 4.1.2.2 Line Cord Connection DT400 Install the modular plug of the Line Cord into the Line Connector at the back of terminal. Push until it snaps into place. Refer to Figure 5-48 Installing the Line Cord (DT400).

  • Page 477: Figure 5-50 Line Cord Groove Back Of Terminal (Dt400)

    Issue 10.0 Cord Groove (DT400). Figure 5-49 Line Cord Groove (DT400) Turn the terminal over and place it so the Line Cord can be passed through the groove between the tilt legs. Refer to Figure 5-50 Line Cord Groove Back of Terminal (DT400).

  • Page 478: Figure 5-51 Installing The Line Cord (Dt500)

    Issue 10.0 4.1.2.3 Line Cord Connection DT500 Install the modular plug of the Line Cord into the Line Connector at the back of terminal. Push until it snaps into place. Refer to Figure 5-51 Installing the Line Cord (DT500). Figure 5-51 Installing the Line Cord (DT500) Install the Line Cord in the groove.

  • Page 479: Figure 5-54 Remove Panel And Designation Label

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-53 Line Cord Groove Back of Terminal (DT500) 4.1.3 Removal and Replacement of Panel and Designation Label 4.1.3.1 Removal of Panel and Designation Label Gently insert a pointed rod into the gap on the right side of the panel.

  • Page 480: Figure 5-55 Replace Panel And Designation Label

    Issue 10.0 Place Designation label in line with the phone button. Figure 5-55 Replace Panel and Designation Label Align the panel with the buttons on the phone, then press the four corners until they click into place. Applying Power to the DT700/DT800/DT900 Multiline Terminal The DT700/DT800/DT900 series terminals support two different power sources: AC-2R/AC-3R ...

  • Page 481: Figure 5-56 Ip Terminal Connector Locations

    Issue 10.0 Connecting the DT700/DT800/DT900 Series IP Multiline Terminal to the Network and PC These instructions for connecting an IP multiline terminal to the Network and PC apply to DT700/DT800/DT900 series multiline terminals. 4.3.1 Connecting the DT700/DT800 Series IP Multiline Terminal to the Network and PC Confirm the location of AC adapter and the LAN connector at the back of the multiline terminal.

  • Page 482: Figure 5-57 Typical Network Ip Connection

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-57 Typical Network IP Connection 4.3.2 Connecting the DT900 Series IP Multiline Terminal to the Network and PC Confirm the location of AC adapter and the LAN connector at the back of the multiline terminal. Then connect the multiline terminal using the steps shown below.

  • Page 483: Figure 5-59 Ip Terminal Connector Locations

    Issue 10.0 Connect the LAN Network cable to the LAN (=) connector. The IP terminal has a switching HUB to connect a PC to the LAN Network. Connect the 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T straight cable used for this connection to the PC(x) connector and to the PC. Refer to Figure 5-56 IP Terminal Connector Locations.
  • Page 484 Issue 10.0 4.3.3 Connecting a Bluetooth Device to the ITK-8TCGX-1 or ITK-32TCG-1 Terminal Bluetooth Interface 4.3.3.1 Technical Information Bluetooth Interface Version: 5.0 Frequency Range (in MHz): 2402 - 2480 MHz Max Output (EIRP): 7.95 dBm 4.3.3.2 Selecting a Location Before choosing a location for your new telephone, consider these important guidelines: If multiple ITK-8TCGX-1 or ITK-32TCG-1 terminals are installed, keep terminals at least 3.3 feet (1 meter) apart.

  • Page 485: Figure 5-61 Adjusting The Lcd On A Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Adjusting the LCD on the Multiline Terminal DT300/DT400/DT700/DT800 series display multiline terminals have an adjustable Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). The LCD can be adjusted by pulling up or pushing down as desired. Figure 5-61 Adjusting the LCD on a Multiline Terminal Adjusting the Height on the Multiline Terminal Adjusting the Height on the DT300/DT400/DT700/DT800 4.5.1...

  • Page 486: Figure 5-62 Adjust Height Of Dt Series Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-62 Adjust Height of DT Series Terminal Turn telephone over (button side up). 4.5.2 Adjusting the Height on the DT500/DT900 Multiline Terminals The height of the DT500/DT900 series multiline terminals can be adjusted by moving the legs attached to the bottom of the terminal. Figure 5-63 Adjust Height of DT500/DT900 Series Terminal Turn telephone over (button side down).

  • Page 487: Figure 5-64 Adjust Legs On Dt500/Dt900 Series Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Adjust legs to desired height (refer to Figure 5-62 Adjust Height of DT Series Terminal). Figure 5-64 Adjust Legs on DT500/DT900 Series Terminal Turn telephone over (button side up). Removing or Installing the Tilt Legs on the Multiline Terminal The Tilt Legs can be removed or installed on the DT300/DT400/DT700/DT800 series multiline terminal.

  • Page 488: Figure 5-66 Removing Tilt Legs From Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Push downward (two arrows) and slide downward (refer to Figure 5-66 Removing Tilt Legs from Multiline Terminal). Figure 5-66 Removing Tilt Legs from Multiline Terminal Lift and remove the Tilt Legs. 4.6.2 Install Tilt Legs Place the telephone on a flat surface (button side down). Lay the adjustable Tilt legs on top of the telephone.

  • Page 489: Figure 5-68 Connecting The Tilt Legs

    Issue 10.0 Push the Tilt Legs upward until they snap into place. Lift both ends of Tilt Legs until they come together (refer to Figure 5-68 Connecting the Tilt Legs on page 5-75). Figure 5-68 Connecting the Tilt Legs Snap legs together and adjust to desired height. Refer to Figure 5-69 Adjust Height of DT Series Terminal.

  • Page 490: Low Position Setting

    Issue 10.0 Adjusting the Tilt Legs on the DT820 Multiline Terminal The terminal provides adjustable legs for angling the phone to best suit each user. The legs can be set for two different heights (Low/High). 4.7.1 Low Position Setting Turn the terminal over (button side down). Adjust the legs to desired height.

  • Page 491: High Position Setting

    Issue 10.0 4.7.2 High Position Setting Turn the terminal over (button side down). Pull up the Leg Stoppers. Figure 5-72 Leg Stoppers Adjust the leg to desired height. Figure 5-73 Setting for High Position Lead the Line and Handset cords through the applicable grooves. Refer to Figure 5-71 Cabling of Multiline Terminal on page 5-76.

  • Page 492: Wall Mounting The Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Wall Mounting the Multiline Terminal You can wall mount a DT series multiline terminal using the base cover or an optional wall mount unit. A wall mount unit must be used if adapters are installed on the multiline terminal. ...

  • Page 493: Figure 5-76 Bundling The Line Cord

    Issue 10.0 4.8.1.2 Wall Mounting the Multiline Terminal Plug line cord in the wall receptacle. Leave about eight inches of cord and bundle the rest as shown in Figure 5-76 Bundling the Line Cord. Figure 5-76 Bundling the Line Cord Ensure the Tilt Legs are in the flat (unused position).

  • Page 494: Figure 5-78 Mount Multiline Terminal Wall On Wall Plate

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-78 Mount Multiline Terminal Wall on Wall Plate Push spare line cord behind the multiline terminal. 4.8.1.3 Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Wall Mounted Base Plate. To remove the multiline terminal, push up on the terminal until it comes loose.

  • Page 495: Figure 5-80 Wall Mounting Base On Wall Plate

    Issue 10.0 4.8.1.4 Wall Mounting the Base on a Wall Plate Locate the screw holes on the base and hang the cover over the screws on the wall plate as illustrated in Figure 5-80 Wall Mounting Base on Wall Plate. Figure 5-80 Wall Mounting Base on Wall Plate Hang the multiline terminal on the base.

  • Page 496: Figure 5-82 Sliding The Hanger Hook Into Position

    Issue 10.0 4.8.2 Wall Mounting a DT500/DT900 Multiline Terminal using the Base Plate 4.8.2.1 Adjusting the Hanger Hook Remove the hook from the unit. Turn the hook with the tab toward the top. Slide the hook until it glides into position forming the hanger hook for the handset.

  • Page 497: Figure 5-85 Mount Multiline Terminal Wall On Wall Plate

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-84 Plugging in Line Cord Align the two holes on the back of the multiline terminal with the two screws on the wall plate and slide downward (refer Figure 5-85 Mount Multiline Terminal Wall on Wall Plate). Figure 5-85 Mount Multiline Terminal Wall on Wall Plate Push spare line cord behind the multiline terminal.

  • Page 498: Figure 5-86 Removing The Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 4.8.2.3 Removing the Multiline Terminal from the Wall Mounted Base Plate. To remove the multiline terminal, push up on the terminal until it comes loose. Figure 5-86 Removing the Multiline Terminal 4.8.2.4 Wall Mounting the Base on a Wall Plate Locate the screw holes on the base and hang the cover over the screws on the wall plate as illustrated in Figure 5-80 Wall...

  • Page 499: Figure 5-88 Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Hang the multiline terminal on the base. Figure 5-88 Wall Mounted Multiline Terminal  Because of variation in wall plates, this method is not recommended. SV9100 System Hardware Manual 5-85...

  • Page 500: Figure 5-89 Ip4Ww-Wall Mount Unit Spacing Guide

    Issue 10.0 4.9 W DT820 T OUNTING THE ERMINAL The IP4WW-Wall Mount Unit is used to mount the DT820 terminals to the wall. This unit connects to the back of the terminal. 4.9.1 Wall Mounting the DT820 Use the template in Figure 5-89 IP4WW-Wall Mount Unit Spacing Guide required spacing before drilling.

  • Page 501: Figure 5-90 Installing The Screws

    Issue 10.0 Install two screws into wall. Leave about 0.12” (3mm) spacing between screw head and wall. Figure 5-90 Installing the Screws 4.9.2 Adjusting the Hanger Hook Remove the hanger hook from the unit. Figure 5-91 Removing the Hanger Hook Hanger Hook Turn the hook with the tab toward the top.

  • Page 502: Figure 5-92 Sliding The Hanger Hook Into Position

    Issue 10.0 Slide the hook until it glides into position forming the hanger hook for the handset. Figure 5-92 Sliding the Hanger Hook into Position Installing the IP4WW-Wall Mount Unit 4.9.3 From the back of the terminal, move the handset cable to the cable groove shown (refer to Figure 5-93 Relocating the Handset Cable).

  • Page 503: Figure 5-94 Installing The Ip4Ww-Wall Mount Unit

    Issue 10.0 Move the leg to the folded position. Attach the IP4WW-Wall Mount Unit to the terminal (refer to Figure 5-94 Installing the IP4WW-Wall Mount Unit). Figure 5-94 Installing the IP4WW-Wall Mount Unit Pass the LAN cable through bottom of the IP4WW-Wall Mount Unit and plug into the LAN port.

  • Page 504: Figure 5-96 Wall Mounting The Dt820

    Issue 10.0 4.9.4 Wall Mounting the DT820 Multiline Terminal Using the screws previously installed, mount the terminal on the wall. Figure 5-96 Wall Mounting the DT820 5-90 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones...

  • Page 505: Optional Equipment

    ULTILINE ERMINALS PTIONAL QUIPMENT DT Series Terminal Options The following charts provide a quick overview of the options available with the DT/IT Series terminals for UNIVERGE SV9100 . Table 5-13 Connectivity of Options (DT300/DT700) IP Terminals Digital Terminals Value ITL-8LD-1...

  • Page 506: Table 5-14 Connectivity Of Options (Dt400/Dt800)

    Issue 10.0 Table 5-14 Connectivity of Options (DT400/DT800) IP Terminals Digital Terminals Value ITZ-8LD-3 Entry Value ITZ-8LDG-3 Economy Terminal Options ITY-6D-1 DTZ-8LD-3 ITZ-12D-3 DTZ-2E-3 ITY-8LDX-1 DTZ-12D-3 ITZ-24D-3 DTZ-6DE-3 ITY-8LCGX-1 DTZ-24D-3 ITZ-12CG-3 ITZ-12DG-3 Ten Key Kit    12LK Kit ITZ-12CG/12DG only ...

  • Page 507: Installing The 8Lk-L Unit

    Issue 10.0 Multiline Terminals Optional Equipment 5.2.1 8LK-L UNIT (BK/WH) Provides eight additional line keys to DT300/DT400/DT700/DT800 series terminals (except Economy). The unit features: Mounts directly to right side of terminal  Supports Red and Green LED colors  Figure 5-97 8LK-L UNIT 5.2.1.1 Installing the 8LK-L UNIT To prevent possible damage to the 8LK-L UNIT...

  • Page 508: Figure 5-99 Securing The 8Lk-L Unit With Screws

    Issue 10.0 Return the multiline terminal to the buttons side up position. Fit the projections on the side of the 8LK-L UNIT into the guide holes on the side of the multiline terminal. Secure the 8LK-L UNIT with the two screws provided. Figure 5-99 Securing the 8LK-L UNIT with Screws Turn the multiline terminal upside down.

  • Page 509: Figure 5-101 8Lk-K Unit

    Issue 10.0 5.2.2 8LK-K UNIT (BK/WH) Provides eight additional line keys to DT500/DT900 series terminals. The unit features: Mounts directly to right side of terminal  Supports Red and Green LED colors  Figure 5-101 8LK-K UNIT 5.2.2.1 Installing the 8LK-K UNIT To prevent possible damage to the 8LK-K UNIT or the DT Series multiline terminal during WARNING...

  • Page 510: Figure 5-102 Install 8Lk-K Unit Using 2 Screws

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-102 Install 8LK-K UNIT Using 2 Screws Lift the small lid on the multiline terminal to access to cable connector (refer to Figure 5-103 Connect 8LK-K UNIT Cable on page 5-97). Slide the black plastic covering toward the 8LK-K Unit to protect the exposed wires.

  • Page 511: Figure 5-103 Connect 8Lk-K Unit Cable

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-103 Connect 8LK-K UNIT Cable Turn the multiline terminal and 8LK over. To replace the name strip, lift the function button panel using the indent at the bottom of the button panel (refer to Figure 5-104 Install Designation Label on page 5-98).

  • Page 512: Figure 5-104 Install Designation Label

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-104 Install Designation Label 5-98 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones...

  • Page 513: Installing The 8Lkd (Ld)-L Unit

    Issue 10.0 5.2.3 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT (BK/WH) Provides eight additional line keys to DT300 Series (DTL) terminals. The unit features: Mounts directly to top of terminal  Supports Self-Labeling 2 LCD panels  Eight line keys by four pages  Figure 5-105 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT 5.2.3.1 Installing the 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT...

  • Page 514: Figure 5-106 Remove Side Panel From Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Pry the side panel from the multiline terminal. Figure 5-106 Remove Side Panel from Multiline Terminal Screw Side Panel Remove the screw (refer to Figure 5-106 Remove Side Panel from Multiline Terminal on page 5-100). Carefully, return the multiline terminal to the buttons side up. Remove the Softkeys and Line Key kit from the telephone.

  • Page 515: Figure 5-108 Ribbon Cable Installed

    Issue 10.0 Plug ribbon cable on back of 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT into connector until pressure is felt. Press down on the black bar to lock the cable into place (refer to Figure 5-108 Ribbon Cable Installed on page 5-101). Figure 5-108 Ribbon Cable Installed Guide Projection Guide...

  • Page 516: Figure 5-110 Install Screw

    Issue 10.0 Holding the LCD in place, turn the multiline terminal button side down. Install the screw (refer to Figure 5-110 Install Screw). Figure 5-110 Install Screw Screw Side Panel Attach the side panel to the side of the 8LKD (LD)-L UNIT (refer to Figure 5-116 Install Screw on page 5-106).

  • Page 517: Installing The 8Lki (Ld)-L Unit

    Issue 10.0 5.2.4 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT (BK/WH) Provides eight additional line keys to DT700 Series (ITL) Self-Labeling terminals. The unit features: Mounts directly to top of terminal  Supports Self-Labeling 2 LCD panels  Eight line keys by four pages ...

  • Page 518: Figure 5-112 Remove Side Panel From Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Pry the side panel from the multiline terminal. Figure 5-112 Remove Side Panel from Multiline Terminal Screw Side Panel Remove the screw (refer to Figure 5-112 Remove Side Panel from Multiline Terminal). Carefully, return the multiline terminal to the buttons side up. Remove the Softkeys and Line Key kit from the telephone.

  • Page 519: Figure 5-114 Ribbon Cable Installed

    Issue 10.0 Plug ribbon cable on back of 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT into connector (metal side down) until pressure is felt. Press down on the black bar to lock the cable into place (refer to Figure 5-114 Ribbon Cable Installed). Figure 5-114 Ribbon Cable Installed Guide Projection Guide...

  • Page 520: Figure 5-116 Install Screw

    Issue 10.0 Holding the LCD in place, turn the multiline terminal button side down. Install screw (refer to Figure 5-116 Install Screw). Figure 5-116 Install Screw Screw Side Panel Attach the side panel to the side of the 8LKI (LD)-L UNIT (refer to Figure 5-116 Install Screw).

  • Page 521: Installing The 12Lk-L Kit

    Issue 10.0 5.2.5.1 Installing the 12LK-L KIT To prevent possible damage to the 12LK-L KIT or the DTL/ITL multiline terminal during WARNING installation or removal, disconnect the line cord/ LAN cable and the AC/DC adapter from the DTL/ITL multiline terminal. Turn multiline terminal upside down.

  • Page 522: Figure 5-119 Removing The Desi Sheet

    Issue 10.0 Lift and remove the DESI sheet. Figure 5-119 Removing the DESI Sheet DESI Sheet Press the right end of the Line Key placeholder and lift to remove (refer to Figure 5-120 Removing the Line Key Placeholder). Figure 5-120 Removing the Line Key Placeholder 5-108 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones...

  • Page 523: Figure 5-121 Aligning The 12Lk-L Kit

    Issue 10.0 Install the 12LK-L KIT and slide until aligned with the Tab Hole. Figure 5-121 Aligning the 12LK-L KIT Press on the right end of the 12LK-L KIT until a click is heard. Figure 5-122 Installing the 12LK-L KIT SV9100 System Hardware Manual 5-109...

  • Page 524: Figure 5-123 Installing The Desi Sheet

    Issue 10.0 If desired, print and install the new DESI sheet. Figure 5-123 Installing the DESI Sheet Install the supplied Line Key Panel (refer to Figure 5-124 Installing the Line Key Panel). A variety of colors is now available for the 12 and 24 button LK Panels (refer to Chapter 1, Table 1-13 DT300/DT700 Series Optional Equipment List on page...

  • Page 525: Configuring The Digital Telephone For The Correct Number Of Line Keys

    Issue 10.0 5.2.5.2 Configuring the Digital Telephone for the Correct Number of Line Keys With the telephone not plugged in and the handset on-hook, press the 4 and 6 buttons on the numbered keypad and connect the telephone cable.  This places the telephone into Service Class Read/ Write (R/W) mode.

  • Page 526: Table 5-18 Line Key Kit Type

    Issue 10.0 Table 5-17 Ten Key Kit Type (Continued) Ten Key Kit Entry Description Kit3 Type B – US with cursor key Kit4 Kit8 32 Line Key without cursor key Kit9 Type A – Japan without cursor key Kit10 Type A – US without cursor key Kit11 Type B –...

  • Page 527: Figure 5-125 Attaching Directory Card To Directory Card Holder

    Issue 10.0 5.2.6 Installing the Directory Card on the DT300/DT700 series Multiline Terminal A directory card can be attached to DT300/DT700 Series multiline terminals. The directory card can be used to record often dialed numbers or other important information. After recording the information on the lined insert, reinsert it between the plastic panels of the directory card.

  • Page 528: Figure 5-126 Attaching Directory Card Holder To The Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-126 Attaching Directory Card Holder to the Multiline Terminal 5-114 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones...

  • Page 529: Figure 5-127 Installing Directory Card Holder To The Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 5.2.7 Installing the Directory Card (Directory Card Unit (L)) on the DT500 and DT900 Series Multiline Terminal A directory card can be attached to DT500 and DT900 series multiline terminals. The directory card can be used to record often dialed numbers or other important information.

  • Page 530: Figure 5-128 Standard Numbered Keypad

    Issue 10.0 5.2.8 Removal and Replacement of the DT300/DT400/DT700/DT800 Series Numbered Keypad The Numbered Keypad (in black or white), is commonly delivered in the Business/Standard Layout configuration (refer to Figure 5-128 Standard Numbered Keypad) and can be easily removed and replaced. Figure 5-128 Standard Numbered Keypad 5.2.8.1 Removing the Numbered Keypad...

  • Page 531: Figure 5-130 Removing Numbered Keypad From Dt300/Dt700 Series Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Pull down on the tab and lift the Numbered Keypad away from the telephone to remove the existing button. Refer to Figure 5-130 Removing Numbered Keypad from DT300/ DT700 Series Terminal. Figure 5-130 Removing Numbered Keypad from DT300/DT700 Series Terminal 5.2.8.2 Installing the Numbered Keypad...

  • Page 532: Figure 5-132 Install Plastic Panels

    Issue 10.0 Install the Numbered Keypad Panel on the multiline terminal. Refer to Figure 5-132 Install Plastic Panels. Figure 5-132 Install Plastic Panels Line Key Panel Numbered Keypad Panel Desi Printer Sheet 5.2.9 Removal and Replacement of the DT500/DT900 Series Numbered Keypad The Numbered Keypad (in black or white), is commonly delivered in the Business/Standard Layout configuration (refer to...

  • Page 533: Figure 5-134 Remove Plastic Panels

    Issue 10.0 5.2.9.1 Removing the Numbered Keypad Panel To prevent possible damage to the Numbered Keypad or the DTL/ITL multiline terminal WARNING during installation or removal, disconnect the line cord/LAN cable and the AC/DC adapter from the DTL/ITL multiline terminal. Remove the Numbered Keypad Panel (refer to Figure 5-129 Remove Plastic...

  • Page 534: Figure 5-135 Install Plastic Panels

    5.2.10 Removal and Replacement of the BS( )-L Kit (Ten Key Kit) The Business BS( )-L Kit (in black or white), is commonly delivered with the UNIVERGE SV9100 multiline terminal. If required, the BS( )-L Kit can be removed and replaced on the DT300/DT700 Series multiline terminal.

  • Page 535: Figure 5-137 Remove The Ten Key Kit

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-136 Remove Plastic Panels Line Key Panel Numbered Keypad Panel Desi Printer Sheet Side Panel Remove the Numbered Keypad panel. (Refer to paragraph Figure 5-137 Remove the Ten Key Kit.) Carefully pry and lift the Ten Key kit from the multiline terminal.

  • Page 536: Figure 5-138 Install The Ten Key Kit

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-138 Install the Ten Key Kit Press down until the Ten Key kit clicks into place. Figure 5-139 Secure the Ten Key Kit Reinstall the Line Key and Numbered Keypad panels on the multiline terminal. 5-122 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones...

  • Page 537: Figure 5-140 Install Plastic Panels

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-140 Install Plastic Panels Line Key Panel Numbered Keypad Panel Desi Printer Sheet Side Panel Reinstall the right side panel (refer to Figure 5-140 Install Plastic Panels). SV9100 System Hardware Manual 5-123...
  • Page 538 Issue 10.0 5.2.10.3 Configuring the Digital Telephone for the Ten Key Kit With the telephone not plugged in and the handset on-hook, press the 4 and 6 buttons on the numbered keypad and connect the telephone cable.  This places the telephone into Service Class Read/ Write (R/W) mode.

  • Page 539: Table 5-20 Keypad Kit Type

    Issue 10.0 Press 4 for Adjust. Press 2 for Key Kit Type. Press the Up/Down key to select the keypad kit. Table 5-20 Keypad Kit Type Keypad Kit Entry Description Kit1 Type A – Japan with cursor key Kit2 Type A – US with cursor key Kit3 Type B –...

  • Page 540: Figure 5-141 Sticker-Braille-L Kit (Sheet 1)

    Issue 10.0 5.2.11 Installing the Sticker-Braille-L KIT Stickers 1 and 2 (2-button, 6-button, 12-button and 24-button telephones) Stickers 1 and 2 are attached by peeling the sticker from the sheet and applying it to the face plate (it can be applied over the LCD) or by cutting the sticker from the sheet and placing the sticker in the Directory Card holder.

  • Page 541: Figure 5-142 Sticker-Braille-L Kit (Sheet 2)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-142 Sticker-Braille-L KIT (Sheet 2) SV9100 System Hardware Manual 5-127...

  • Page 542: Figure 5-143 Braille Seal-K And Braille Paraphrase Label-K(E)

    Issue 10.0 5.2.12 Installing the Sticker-Braille-K KIT STICKER-BRAILLE-K includes BRAILLE SEAL-K(E) and BRAILLE PARAPHRASE LABEL-K(E). Figure 5-143 BRAILLE SEAL-K and BRAILLE PARAPHRASE LABEL-K(E) 5-128 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones...

  • Page 543: Figure 5-144 Sticker-Braille-K Kit

    Issue 10.0 BRAILLE SEAL-K(E) is a braille sticker pasted at function key on Multiline Terminal. This braille appears by simple alphabet. BRAILLE PARAPHRASE LABEL-K(E) is a reinterpretation from simple alphabet to Function Key name. About BRAILLE PARAPHRASE LABEL-K(E), set up near your telephone and use it.

  • Page 544: Figure 5-145 Dcl-60-1/Dcz-60-2 Console

    Issue 10.0 5.2.13 DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE (BK/WH) The Attendant Console has 60 programmable line keys and is available in black or white. The unit features: 60 programmable Direct Station Selection (DSS) keys (refer to  system user guides) Supported on ITL or DTL modular terminals ...

  • Page 545: Figure 5-146 Remove Side Panel From Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 5.2.13.1 Installing the DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE To prevent possible damage to the DCL-60-1/ DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE or the DT Series multiline WARNING terminal during installation or removal, disconnect the line cord/LAN cable and the AC/ DC adapter from the DTL/ITL multiline terminal If a “Digital Port Connection”...

  • Page 546: Figure 5-147 Secure Bracket To Multiline Terminal With Screws

    Issue 10.0 Attach the bracket with three supplied screws. Figure 5-147 Secure Bracket to Multiline Terminal with Screws Screws Carefully push the Serial cable into the Serial Cable Groove (DT700/DT800 only). Figure 5-148 Press Serial Cable into Groove Using the guides, slide the DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE onto the installed bracket (refer to Figure 5-148 Press Serial Cable into...

  • Page 547: Figure 5-149 Securing The Dcl-60-1/Dcz-60-2 Console With Screws

    Issue 10.0 Secure the DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE to the bracket with the two screws provided. Figure 5-149 Securing the DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE with Screws Open the small door covering the side option connectors by pulling the cover latch toward you (refer to Figure 5-150 Serial Cable Installed, ITL, DT700 only).

  • Page 548: Figure 5-151 Connect Ac Adapter Cable

    Issue 10.0 Set the height of the tilt leg on the DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE to match the tilt leg on the multiline terminal. Attach the side panel to the side of the DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE. Return the multiline terminal and DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE to the buttons side up position. Connect the digital cable to the LINE jack (DT300/DT400 only).

  • Page 549: Figure 5-153 Dck-60-1 Console (Bk/Wh)

    Issue 10.0 5.2.14 DCK-60-1 CONSOLE (BK/WH) The Attendant Console has 60 programmable line keys and is available in black or white. The unit features: 60 programmable Direct Station Selection (DSS) keys (refer to  system user guides) Supported on ITK or DTK modular terminals ...

  • Page 550: Figure 5-154 Install Telephone Connection Cable

    Issue 10.0 To prevent possible damage to the DCK-60-1 or the DT Series multiline terminal during WARNING installation or removal, disconnect the line cord/ LAN cable and the AC/DC adapter from the DTK/ ITK multiline terminal ❍ If connected to an IP phone as a side option, a maximum of one DSS Console is supported per telephone.

  • Page 551: Figure 5-155 Dss To Ip Multiline Connection

    Issue 10.0 Slide the black plastic covering toward the DSS console to protect the exposed wires. Carefully plug the DSS console cable into the connector on the multiline terminal (refer to Figure 5-155 DSS to IP Multiline Connection). Figure 5-155 DSS to IP Multiline Connection Route the cables around the cross rib on the multiline terminal to hide the extra cable.

  • Page 552: Figure 5-156 Installing The Dss Console Support Bracket

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-156 Installing the DSS Console Support Bracket Connect the AC Adapter plug to the AC adapter connector on the DSS console (refer to Figure 5-157 Installing the AC Adapter on page 5-139). 5-138 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones...

  • Page 553: Figure 5-157 Installing The Ac Adapter

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-157 Installing the AC Adapter Connect the Line Cord modular plug to the LINE connector on the DSS console (refer to Figure 5-158 Installing the DSS Console LINE Connection). Press the line cord into the groove of the DSS console. Figure 5-158 Installing the DSS Console LINE Connection Align the height of the tilt legs on the multiline terminal and DSS console.

  • Page 554: Figure 5-159 Installing The Designation Label

    Issue 10.0 Attach the Designation label and function button panel (refer Figure 5-159 Installing the Designation Label). Align the Designation label and top panel with the button on the DSS and carefully press until it clicks into position. Figure 5-159 Installing the Designation Label Verify the panel and Designation label are securely installed.

  • Page 555: Figure 5-161 Installing Dck-60-1 Console (Bk/Wh) Standalone

    Issue 10.0 CONSOLE as Standalone 5.2.14.2 Installing the DCK-60-1 Console Connect the Line Cord modular plug to the LINE connector on the DSS console (refer to Figure 5-161 Installing DCK- 60-1 CONSOLE (BK/WH) Standalone). Press the line cord into the groove of the DSS console. Figure 5-161 Installing DCK-60-1 CONSOLE (BK/WH) Standalone Adjust the tilt legs on the DSS console to the desired height.

  • Page 556: Figure 5-162 Installing The Designation Label

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-162 Installing the Designation Label Installation of the Standalone DSS is complete. Figure 5-163 Standalone DCK-60-1 CONSOLE (BK/WH) 5-142 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones...

  • Page 557: Figure 5-164 Lcd (Bl)-L Unit

    Issue 10.0 5.2.15 LCD (BL)-L UNIT (BK/WH) The LCD (BL)-L UNIT is an optional LCD unit for modular terminals and supports the backlit LCD feature (DT300 Series only). Figure 5-164 LCD (BL)-L UNIT 5.2.16 LCD (BL)-Z UNIT (BK/WH) The LCD (BL)-Z UNIT is an optional LCD unit for modular terminals and supports the backlit LCD feature (DT400 Series only).

  • Page 558: Figure 5-167 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (Wm-L Unit)

    Issue 10.0 5.2.18 WM-L UNIT The WM-L UNIT (Wall Mount Unit) is used to attach any DT Series multiline terminal to the wall. This unit connects to the bottom of the telephone. When optional adapters are used, the multiline terminal must be installed on the wall using the WM-L UNIT.

  • Page 559: Figure 5-168 Attach Wm-L Unit Using Screws

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-168 Attach WM-L UNIT Using Screws Plug one end of the line cord into the wall receptacle. Leave about eight inches of cord and bundle the rest. Plug the opposite end of the line cord into the multiline terminal as illustrated in Figure 5-169 Plugging in Line Cord.

  • Page 560: Figure 5-170 Cutouts For Wm-L Unit

    Issue 10.0 Align the four cutouts on the bottom of the multiline terminal (refer to Figure 5-170 Cutouts for WM-L UNIT) with the tabs on the WM-L UNIT (refer to Figure 5-171 WM-L UNIT Tabs). Figure 5-170 Cutouts for WM-L UNIT Figure 5-171 WM-L UNIT Tabs Tabs Tabs...

  • Page 561: Figure 5-172 Wm-L Unit Installed

    Issue 10.0 Push down until the multiline terminal snaps into place (refer Figure 5-172 WM-L UNIT Installed). Figure 5-172 WM-L UNIT Installed To release the multiline terminal from the WM-L UNIT, press the release button and push the telephone up (refer to Figure 5-173 WM-L UNIT Release Button).

  • Page 562: Figure 5-174 Attach Wm-L Unit To Wall Plate

    Issue 10.0 5.2.18.2 Mount Multiline Terminal on Wall Plate using WM-L UNIT Locate the screw holes on the base and hang the cover over the screws on the wall plate as illustrated in Figure 5-174 Attach WM-L UNIT to Wall Plate.

  • Page 563: Figure 5-176 Cutouts For Wm-L Unit

    Issue 10.0 Align the four cutouts on the bottom of the multiline terminal (refer to Figure 5-176 Cutouts for WM-L UNIT) with the tabs on the WM-L UNIT (refer to Figure 5-177 WM-L UNIT Tabs). Figure 5-176 Cutouts for WM-L UNIT Figure 5-177 WM-L UNIT Tabs Tabs Tabs...

  • Page 564: Figure 5-178 Wm-L Unit Installed

    Issue 10.0 Push down until the multiline terminal snaps into place (refer Figure 5-178 WM-L UNIT Installed). Figure 5-178 WM-L UNIT Installed To remove the WM-L UNIT from the wall panel, push up on the telephone until it comes loose (refer to Figure 5-179 Removing the Multiline Terminal).

  • Page 565: Figure 5-180 Wm-L Unit Release Button

    Issue 10.0 To separate the multiline terminal from the WM-L UNIT, press the release button and slide the multiline terminal up (refer to Figure 5-180 WM-L UNIT Release Button). Figure 5-180 WM-L UNIT Release Button SV9100 System Hardware Manual 5-151...

  • Page 566: Figure 5-181 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (Dss Wm-L Unit)

    Issue 10.0 5.2.19 DSS WM-L UNIT The DSS WM-L UNIT (Wall Mount Unit) is used to attach the DCL-60-1/ DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE to the wall. This unit connects to the bottom of the terminal. 5.2.19.1 Mount DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE on Wall using DSS WM-L UNIT Use the template shown in Figure 5-181 Wall Mount Spacing...

  • Page 567: Figure 5-182 Attach Dss Wm-L Unit Using Screws

    Issue 10.0 Attach the DSS WM-L UNIT to the wall using six screws or, using two wall mounted screws (refer to Figure 5-182 Attach DSS WM-L UNIT Using Screws). Figure 5-182 Attach DSS WM-L UNIT Using Screws 5.2.19.2 Mount DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE on Wall Plate using DSS WM-L UNIT Locate the screw holes on the base and hang the cover over the screws on the wall plate as illustrated in...

  • Page 568: Figure 5-184 Plug Cable Into Wall

    Issue 10.0 Plug one end of the line cord into the wall receptacle. Leave about eight inches of cord and bundle the rest. Figure 5-184 Plug Cable into Wall Plug the opposite end of the line cord into the DCL-60-1/ DCZ-60-2 CONSOLE as illustrated in Figure 5-185 Plugging Cable into DCL-60-1/DCZ-60-2...

  • Page 569: Figure 5-186 Wall Mount Spacing Guide (60 Dss Wm-K Unit)

    Issue 10.0 5.2.20 60 DSS WM-K UNIT The 60 DSS WM-K UNIT (Wall Mount Unit) is used to attach the DCK-60-1 CONSOLE to the wall. This unit connects to the bottom of the terminal. 5.2.20.1 Wall Mount DCK-60-1 CONSOLE using 60 DSS WM-K UNIT Use the template shown in Figure 5-186 Wall Mount Spacing...

  • Page 570: Figure 5-187 Attach 60 Dss Wm-K Unit Using Screws

    Issue 10.0 Attach the 60 DSS WM-K UNIT to the wall using four screws or, using two wall mounted screws (refer to Figure 5-187 Attach 60 DSS WM-K UNIT Using Screws). Figure 5-187 Attach 60 DSS WM-K UNIT Using Screws 5.2.20.2 Mount DCK-60-1 CONSOLE on Wall Plate using 60 DSS WM-K UNIT...

  • Page 571: Figure 5-188 Attach 60 Dss Wm-K Unit Using Wall Plate

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-188 Attach 60 DSS WM-K UNIT Using Wall Plate Attach the modular rosette to the cutout of the 60 DSS WM-K UNIT to the wall (refer to Figure 5-189 Attach Modular Rosette). If a modular connector is already located in the wall or if you do not use the modular rosette, as when using a switch box, proceed to Step 3.

  • Page 572: Figure 5-190 Connect Line Cord

    Issue 10.0 Figure 5-190 Connect Line Cord Insert the modular plug of the line cord into the DSS console LINE connector until you hear a click (refer to Figure 5-191 Connect Line Cord to DSS Console). Press the line cord into the groove of the DSS console. Store the extra line cord at the bottom of the 60 DSS WM-K .

  • Page 573: Figure 5-192 Attach Dss Console To 60 Dss Wm-K Unit

    Issue 10.0 Hook four hooks on the DSS console to the hooks on the 60 DSS WM-K (refer to Figure 5-192 Attach DSS Console to 60 DSS WM-K UNIT). Push any excess line cord into your 60 DSS WM-K with your finger.

  • Page 574: Optional Handsets

    Using the PTM handset on an NEC digital or IP terminal prevents eavesdropping and eliminates the worry that privileged information could be transmitted without user authority. These handsets are also an ideal solution to filter unwanted audio transmissions from environments with ambient background noise.

  • Page 575: Utr-1-1 Usb Handset

    Issue 10.0 UTR-1-1 USB Handset The NEC USB telephone can be plugged directly into a PC USB port, enabling the high quality voice input and output abilities of a standard desktop telephone. By connecting it to the USB port of a computer, calls can immediately be made and received using a SoftPhone without installation of additional software drivers.

  • Page 576: Figure 5-197 Wall Mounting The Utr-1-1 Usb Handset

    Issue 10.0 6.3.3 Wall Mounting The UTR-1-1 USB handset can be mounted on the wall using a wall plate or two screws. Align the two holes on the back of the UTR-1-1 and slide down onto the wall plate or screws. Figure 5-197 Wall Mounting the UTR-1-1 USB Handset Because of variation in wall plates, this method is not recommended.

  • Page 577: Table 5-22 Ut880 Platform Information

    Issue 10.0 UT880 IP T ECTION ELEPHONE The UT880 is an IP desk phone for use on the SV9100 system. This phone is powered by Power over Ethernet (PoE) reducing the need for power adapters allowing for a clean installation. In addition, headsets for those users who frequently make long calls are supported for comfort.

  • Page 578: Figure 5-198 Ut880 Telephone (Front View)

    Issue 10.0 Table 5-22 UT880 Platform Information (Continued) Main Item Sub Item Specification USB 2.0 Host (1EA)/USB 3.0 Device (1EA) Additional SD CARD Micro SD support Function Camera 1.3mm FF Power Environmental Operating Temp (°C) -5°C ~ 50°C 10 ~ 90% Humidity (%) UT880 (Front View) The exterior of the UT880 is made from ABS based high strength material with all...

  • Page 579: Figure 5-199 Ut880 Telephone (Rear View)

    Issue 10.0 UT880 (Rear View) The rear of the UT880 is composed of a LAN port for LAN connection and a PC port for PC connection. The PC connection port is connected to a 10Mbps~1Gbps Ethernet switch inside the UT880. This allows the use of only one LAN connection to a phone to be utilized for both telephone and PC workstation network access.

  • Page 580: Single Line Telephones

    Issue 10.0 ECTION INGLE ELEPHONES AT-50 The AT-50 is a single line telephone for use on the SV9100 system. It provides the user with feature keys such as Redial, Flash/Pause, PBX Dial/Set, Search and Mute. 8.1.1 AT-50 Platform Information The AT-50 terminal is designed to be used behind a PBX or KTS system. For detailed information, refer to the AT-50 Caller ID Business Telephone User Guide.

  • Page 581: Figure 5-201 At-50 Telephone (Rear View)

    Issue 10.0 8.1.3 AT-50 (Rear View) The rear of the AT-50 is composed of a LINE port for TDM connection with the SV9100. A HANDSET connection for the included handset, a LMH (Ringer Volume Switch) and MF-DP (Dialing Mode Switch) for specific settings.

  • Page 582: Figure 5-203 Install The Hanger Hook

    Issue 10.0 Mount the telephone on the wall so that the screw heads insert into the slots on the underside of the telephone. Figure 5-202 Wall Mount the AT-50 Remove the hanger hook from the telephone, then reverse it and reinsert on the telephone.

  • Page 583: Figure 5-204 At-50 Hook The Handset

    Issue 10.0 If you wish to temporarily place the handset down during a conversation, hook the handset onto the top of the hanger hook as shown in Figure 5-204 AT-50 Hook the Handset. Figure 5-204 AT-50 Hook the Handset AT-55 The AT-55 is a single line telephone for use on the SV9100 system.

  • Page 584: Figure 5-205 At55 Telephone (Front View)

    Issue 10.0 8.2.2 AT-55 (Front View) Figure 5-205 AT55 Telephone (Front View) 5-170 Installing DT Series Digital, IP Terminals and Single Line Telephones...

  • Page 585: Figure 5-206 At-55 Telephone (Rear View)

    Issue 10.0 8.2.3 AT-55 (Rear View) The rear of the AT-55 is composed of a LINE port for TDM connection with the SV9100. A HANDSET connection for the included handset, a LMH (Ringer Volume Switch) and MF-DP (Dialing Mode Switch) for specific settings.

  • Page 586: Figure 5-208 Install The Hanger Hook

    Issue 10.0 Mount the telephone on the wall so that the screw heads insert into the slots on the underside of the telephone. Figure 5-207 Wall Mount the AT-55 Remove the hanger hook from the telephone, then reverse it and reinsert on the telephone.

  • Page 587: Figure 5-209 At-55 Hook The Handset

    Issue 10.0 If you wish to temporarily place the handset down during a conversation, hook the handset onto the top of the hanger hook as shown in Figure 5-209 At-55 Hook the Handset. Figure 5-209 At-55 Hook the Handset SV9100 System Hardware Manual 5-173...

  • Page 588: Figure 5-210 Itx-1615-1 Telephone (Front View)

    Issue 10.0 ITX-1615-1W (BK) TEL The ITX-1615-1 is a 2-button single line SIP terminal for use on the SV9100 system. It provides the user with feature keys such as Home, Phonebook, Message, Page/Intercom, Hold, Mute, Transfer, Conference, Send, Speaker, Headset and Volume. For detailed information, refer to the Standard SIP Terminal IP Phone ITX-1615 User Guide.

  • Page 589: Figure 5-211 Itx-1615-1 Telephone (Rear View)

    Issue 10.0 8.3.2 ITX-1615-1 (Rear View) Refer to Figure 5-211 ITX-1615-1 Telephone (Rear View) for available ports on the ITX-1615-1 telephone. Figure 5-211 ITX-1615-1 Telephone (Rear View) SV9100 System Hardware Manual 5-175...

  • Page 590: Figure 5-212 Wall Mount The Itx-1615-1

    Issue 10.0 8.3.3 Wall Mounting the ITX-1615-1 This telephone can be mounted on a wall with two screws. The screws shall be supplied by the customer. Mark off the correct position for the screws, approximately 2.375in (60.325mm), apart horizontally opposed before drilling the wall. Install the screws into the wall.

  • Page 591: Figure 6-1 D Term ® Cordless Dect (Dtl-8R-1)

    DECT (DTL-8R-1) ECTION ORDLESS DTL-8R-1 is a cordless telephone that is adapted for digital NEC PBX (Private Branch Exchange. It is designed for use in the office environment. ❍ A handset and wired phone cannot be used at the same time.

  • Page 592: Figure 6-2 System Overview

    Issue 10.0 Figure 6-2 System Overview Selecting a Location term Select a location for the D Cordless DECT to avoid excessive heat or humidity. term The base unit of the D Cordless DECT can be placed on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120V AC outlet and telephone line jack.

  • Page 593: Connecting The Telephone Cords

    Connect the cord from the telephone jack to the Line In on the D Cordless DECT. Figure 6-3 Connecting Telephone Cords to the Telephone Jack term Connect a qualified NEC digital multiline terminal to the D Cordless term DECT (refer to...

  • Page 594: Figure 6-4 Connecting The D Term Cordless Dect To The Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 term Figure 6-4 Connecting the D Cordless DECT to the Multiline Terminal Line "OUT" To DTL Multiline Terminals Applying Power to the Charging Unit The unique design of the telephone allows the user to place the handset in the charging unit with or without the belt clip attached.

  • Page 595: Figure 6-6 Polarized Plug

    Issue 10.0 The AC adapter furnished with this telephone usually has a polarized line plug with one blade wider than the other. This plug fits in the power outlet only one way. If you cannot insert the plug fully in the outlet, try reversing the plug. Refer to Figure 6-6 Polarized Plug.

  • Page 596: Figure 6-7 Attaching The Wall Mount Stand To The Base Unit

    Plug one end of the short telephone cord (locally supplied) in the LINE jack on the base unit. Plug one end of the NEC digital multiline terminal into the PHONE jack. Place the telephone cords inside the molded channels on the bottom of the wall mount stand.

  • Page 597: Figure 6-9 Placing The Base Unit On The Posts Of The Wall Plate

    Issue 10.0 Place the base unit on the posts of the wall plate and push down until it is firmly seated. Figure 6-9 Placing the Base Unit on the Posts of the Wall Plate Because of variation in wall plates, this method is not recommended.

  • Page 598: Mounting The Base Directly To The Wall

    Plug one end of the short telephone cord into the LINE jack on the base unit. Then plug one end of an NEC multiline terminal into the PHONE jack. Place the telephone cords inside the molded channels on the bottom of the...

  • Page 599: Figure 6-12 Placing The Telephone Cords Inside The Wall Mount Stand

    Issue 10.0 Figure 6-12 Placing the Telephone Cords Inside the Wall Mount Stand Place the base unit on the posts of the wall screws and push down until it is firmly seated. Figure 6-13 Attaching the Wall Mount Unit to the Wall Plug the other end of the short telephone cord into a telephone wall jack.

  • Page 600: Wall Mounting The Charging Unit

    Issue 10.0 Wall Mounting the Charging Unit The charging unit can be wall mounted as well. Before mounting the charging unit, consider the following: Select a location away from electrical cables, pipes, or other items behind the  mounting location that could cause a hazard when inserting screws into the wall.

  • Page 601: Attaching And Removing The Belt Clip

    Issue 10.0 Place the charging unit on the posts of the wall screws and push down until it is firmly seated. Figure 6-16 Placing the Charging Unit on the Wall Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120 Vac wall outlet. Refer to Figure 6-16 Placing the Charging Unit on the Wall.

  • Page 602: Figure 6-18 Removing The Belt Clip

    Issue 10.0 To remove the clip, press the retaining clip in toward the belt clip blade and slide the clip up at the same time. Figure 6-18 Removing the Belt Clip Installing the Handset Battery Pack term ® Before installing batteries, refer to D Cordless DECT Owner’s Manual Specifications and Battery Safety.

  • Page 603: Figure 6-20 Replacing The Battery Pack

    Issue 10.0 Slide the battery pack down into the handset. It may be necessary to remove the old battery at this time. Figure 6-20 Replacing the Battery Pack Replace the cover and slide it up until it latches onto the handset. Figure 6-21 Replacing the Battery Cover 2.10 Charging Batteries term...

  • Page 604: Charging Spare Battery Packs

    Issue 10.0 2.11 Charging Spare Battery Packs term The D Cordless DECT is equipped with a battery charger for charging the spare battery pack. term ® DTL-RPT-1 ECTION ORDLESS EPEATER The UDR100 repeater lets you extend the coverage area of your cordless DECT telephone system in all directions.

  • Page 605: Figure 6-23 Single Repeater Attached To Base

    Issue 10.0 If the repeaters are installed so their coverage area overlaps the coverage area of the base, the base can hand-off calls to the repeaters as the user moves from one coverage area to another. When connected to the repeater, the mobile handset operates the exact same way as it does when connected to the base, and the hand-off from the base to the repeater can be completely invisible to the end user, even during an active call.

  • Page 606: Figure 6-24 Six Repeaters Attached To Base

    Issue 10.0 Figure 6-24 Six Repeaters Attached to Base In addition, the UDR100 supports a sequential or "daisy-chain" layout to extend coverage in a single direction. Up to three repeaters can be installed in sequence: Figure 6-25 Daisy-Chain Layout  For detailed information on daisy-chain layout and configuration, contact your installer or refer to the UDR100 Administrator's Guide.

  • Page 607: Setting Up Your Repeater

    Issue 10.0 Setting Up Your Repeater Before installing the repeater, you must activate the repeater mode on your base and then register the repeater to the base and any handsets. Before you start the registration process, be sure you have: A working base ...

  • Page 608: Manual Registration

    Issue 10.0 3.1.3 Manual Registration If you are registering more than one repeater to the same base, you must use the manual registration procedure. Connect the repeater to power for 1~5 seconds and then disconnect Reconnect the power to the repeater. The LED on the repeater flashes slowly, indicating the repeater is in registration mode.

  • Page 609: Installing The Repeater

    Issue 10.0 3.1.4 Registering to a Different Base After the repeater is registered, you must reset it before you can change the registration to a different base. If you want to reset the repeater and clear its registration, follow the steps below: Disconnect the power.

  • Page 610: Figure 6-26 Base Coverage Area

    Issue 10.0 3.2.2 Map the Base Coverage Area To find the best location for the repeater, you need to determine the base coverage area. Stand near the base and make a call. Walk away from the base with the handset, and make a note where the signal becomes weaker. The optimum location for the repeater is as far from the base as possible while still maintaining a good signal, or just inside the location where the signal became weaker.

  • Page 611: Multiple Repeater Systems

    Issue 10.0 3.2.4 Installing the Repeater Be sure the wall material can hold the weight of the repeater. Never install a repeater in damaged or decaying wall material. WARNING Hold the repeater in its final location, and mark the center of the top edge.

  • Page 612: Correct Installation

    Issue 10.0 Figure 6-27 Incorrect Installation 3.2.5.2 Correct Installation Figure 6-28 Base Coverage Area illustrates repeaters that are correctly installed. Figure 6-28 Base Coverage Area 6-22 Installing SV9100 Cordless Telephones...

  • Page 613: Figure 6-29 Daisy-Chain Layout

    Issue 10.0 3.2.5.3 Daisy-Chain Installation You can combine normal and daisy-chain connections to create a wide variety of coverage configurations, as long as you have no more than six repeaters per base unit. Figure 6-29 Daisy-Chain Layout Troubleshooting Chart term ® To review common problems and possible solutions, refer to the D Cordless DECT Repeater Guide DTL-RPT-1.

  • Page 614: Figure 6-30 D Term ® Cordless Dect (Dtz-8R-1)

    ECTION ORDLESS The DTZ-8R-1 is a cordless telephone that is adapted for digital NEC PBX (Private Branch Exchange). It is designed for use in the office environment. When the phone is connected to the digital PBX, it must have a digital PBX expansion bard inside the base station.

  • Page 615: Figure 6-31 System Overview

    Issue 10.0 Figure 6-31 System Overview Selecting a Location term Select a location for the D Cordless DECT to avoid excessive heat or humidity. term The base unit of the D Cordless DECT can be placed on a desk or tabletop near a standard 120V AC outlet and telephone line jack.

  • Page 616: Figure 6-32 Connecting Telephone Cords

    ❍ Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines. To connect the telephone cords: Connect one line cord from NEC’s PBX (or key system) digital station port to term the Line In connector on the D Cordless DECT base unit. Connect...

  • Page 617: Figure 6-33 Applying Power To The Charging Unit

    Issue 10.0 Applying Power to the Charging Unit The unique design of the telephone allows the user to place the handset in the charging unit with or without the belt clip attached. Connect the AC adapter with the green tip to the charging unit and to a suitable AC power source.

  • Page 618: Figure 6-34 Inserting Screws Into The Wall For Wall Mounting The Telephone

    Plug one end of the short telephone cord (locally supplied) in the LINE jack on the base unit. If an NEC multiline (wired) telephone will be used, connect a line cord from the LINE OUT jack on the base unit to the multiline telephone.

  • Page 619: Figure 6-35 Attaching Base Directly To Wall

    Issue 10.0 Place the base unit on the posts of the wall screws and push down until it is firmly seated. Figure 6-35 Attaching Base Directly to Wall Plug the other end of the short telephone cord into a telephone wall jack. Plug the AC adapter into a standard 120 Vac wall outlet.

  • Page 620: Figure 6-36 Attaching The Belt Clip To The Handset

    Issue 10.0 Attaching and Removing the Belt Clip A belt clip can be used to attach the handset to a belt or pocket for convenient portability. Slide the clip into the tab slots. Press firmly until it snaps into place. The belt clip fits snugly onto the handset.

  • Page 621: Figure 6-38 Removing The Battery Cover

    Issue 10.0 Installing the Handset Battery Pack term ® Before installing batteries, refer to D Cordless DECT Owner’s Manual DTZ-8R-1 Specifications and Battery Safety section. It is important to follow safety regulations when handling batteries. Remove the battery cover by pressing the latch and sliding the cover down and off of the handset.

  • Page 622: Figure 6-40 Replacing The Battery Cover

    Issue 10.0 Replace the cover and slide it up until it latches onto the handset. Figure 6-40 Replacing the Battery Cover Charging the Handset Batteries The rechargeable battery pack must be fully charged before using the handset for the first time. Charge the battery pack without interruption for at least 10 hours.

  • Page 623: Bluetooth Cordless Handset (Bch) Interface

    Issue 10.0 ECTION LUETOOTH ORDLESS ANDSET Bluetooth Cordless Handset (BCH) Interface This optional interface allows the multiline terminal user to use Bluetooth technology to provide a cordless handset. This handset provides: Keyset-like Handset  Eight Line Buttons  Function Button ...

  • Page 624: Table 6-2 Bch Charging Leds

    Issue 10.0 When charging the BCH, the following LEDs provide indications of the status: Table 6-2 BCH Charging LEDs On-Hook Charging: Red = Charging Green = Charging Complete Off-Hook (Idle): No LED = Idle Flashing Red = Incoming Call The BCH retains call histories for up to 10 outgoing and 10 incoming calls. For outgoing calls, this includes completed and uncompleted calls.

  • Page 625: Figure 6-42 Bluetooth Cradle Controls And Indicators

    Issue 10.0 Controls and Indicators Controls and indicators can be found in Figure 6-42 Bluetooth Cradle Controls and Indicators Figure 6-43 Bluetooth Handset Controls and Indicators on page 6-36. Figure 6-42 Bluetooth Cradle Controls and Indicators SV9100 System Hardware Manual 6-35...

  • Page 626: Figure 6-43 Bluetooth Handset Controls And Indicators

    Issue 10.0 Figure 6-43 Bluetooth Handset Controls and Indicators 6-36 Installing SV9100 Cordless Telephones...

  • Page 627: Installing The Bluetooth Cordless Handset

    Issue 10.0 Installing the Bluetooth Cordless Handset The BCH-L (BK) UNIT is an optional device that transforms the standard multifunction telephone into a cordless terminal. This section explains how to transform the standard hand-set into a BCH-L (BK) UNIT. The BCH-L (BK) UNIT cannot be connected to the DTL-2E-1, DTL-6DE-1 or DTL-12-E-1 telephones.

  • Page 628: Figure 6-45 Remove Legs From Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Figure 6-45 Remove Legs From Multiline Terminal Remove the side panel. Disconnect serial connection cord from terminal body. Leave cord connected to the cradle unit. Push the latch to the right to unlock the cradle unit. Then push the cradle unit forward to separate it from the terminal body (see Figure 6-46 Detach Cradle from Multiline...

  • Page 629: Figure 6-47 Attach Bluetooth Cradle To The Multiline Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Insert the cradle connecting cable of the Bluetooth Cradle (BTC) into the unit connector. Figure 6-47 Attach Bluetooth Cradle to the Multiline Terminal Fit the projections on the side of the Bluetooth Cradle into the guide holes on the side of the terminal and pull toward you (Figure 6-47 Attach Bluetooth Cradle to the Multiline Terminal) until the unit snaps...

  • Page 630: Figure 6-49 Removing The Connector Cover

    Issue 10.0 Remove the connector cover (rubber) from the bottom of the multiline terminal. Figure 6-49 Removing the Connector Cover Insert the lower claws of the Bottom Unit (see Figure 6-50 Installing the Bottom Unit) into precut holes on the multiline terminal. Figure 6-50 Installing the Bottom Unit Align connector on inside of bottom unit and push down until unit snaps into place.

  • Page 631: Figure 6-51 Stowing The Bottom Unit Cable

    Issue 10.0 Figure 6-51 Stowing the Bottom Unit Cable Cut or trim the supplied coupled device for the tilt legs handset option. Insert the stopper coupled device into the right and left tilt legs (see Figure 6-52 Insert Stopper for Handset Use).

  • Page 632: Figure 6-53 Bluetooth Handset Installed

    Issue 10.0 Place the Bluetooth handset in the cradle. Before you use the handset for the first time or reuse the handset after it has been left out of service for a long time, charge it for at least five hours. A full charge takes NOTE approximately 16 hours.

  • Page 633: Wall Mounting The Bluetooth Cradle

    5.4.2 Wall Mounting the Bluetooth Cradle To prevent possible damage to the BCH-L (BK) UNIT due to falling, NEC recommends installing the unit in a firm WARNING position so it cannot fall because of its own weight. Clearances required for installing the Bluetooth cradle are shown below.

  • Page 634: Figure 6-55 Installing Wood Screws

    Issue 10.0 Figure 6-55 Installing Wood Screws Remove the Bluetooth hanger from the cradle.  With a screwdriver, pry from the bottom, and lift the handset hanger from the cradle. Rotate the hanger top to bottom. Slide it downward in the hollow until it clicks into position.

  • Page 635: Figure 6-57 Separate Tilt Leg From Leg Support

    Issue 10.0 Turn multiline terminal upside down. Lower the tilt leg to the first position (refer to Figure 6-44 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support). Figure 6-57 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support Stoppers Tilt Leg Hook the wall mount holes (C and D) on the back of the terminal on wood screws (c and d) installed.

  • Page 636: Remove And Replace Handset Battery

    Issue 10.0 5.4.3 Remove and Replace Handset Battery The battery loaded in the Bluetooth handset has a useful life of about two years, depending on how the handset is used. If the battery voltage diminishes quickly after the battery has been charged for a long time, replace with a new Li-ion battery.

  • Page 637: Bluetooth Hub Adapter (Bha) Features

    Issue 10.0 ECTION LUETOOTH DAPTER Bluetooth Hub Adapter (BHA) Features The BHA-L UNIT adapter connects a Bluetooth device to a multiline terminal. The BHA-L UNIT cannot be connected to the DTL-2E-1, DTL-6DE-1 or DTL-12E-1 telephone. 6.1.1 Installing the BHA-L UNIT Before installing or removing the BHA-L UNIT, remove the line cord and the AC adapter from the outlet.

  • Page 638: Figure 6-62 Removing The Connector Cover

    Issue 10.0 Figure 6-62 Removing the Connector Cover Insert the lower claws of the Bottom Unit (see Figure 6-63 Installing the BHA-L UNIT) into precut holes on the multiline terminal. Figure 6-63 Installing the BHA-L UNIT Align connector on inside of BHA-L UNIT and push down until unit snaps into place.

  • Page 639: Accessing The Bluetooth Device Setup Screen

    Issue 10.0 6.1.2 Pairing a Bluetooth Device and Multiline Terminal (Bluetooth Installed) Access the Bluetooth screen from a multiline terminal menu and register the Bluetooth headset with the BHA-L UNIT. 6.1.2.1 Accessing the Bluetooth Device Setup Screen From the multiline terminal, access the setup screen using one of the following: If the BHA-L UNIT is connected to an SV9100: ...

  • Page 640: Figure 6-66 Connecting The Paired Device

    Issue 10.0 6.1.2.4 Connecting the Paired Device Enable the Bluetooth device. Select [2 Enable] in the Connect screen. After pairing a Bluetooth device, be sure to configure its connection to enable it. If settings are not completed, the Bluetooth device that does CAUTION the pairing cannot be used.

  • Page 641: Figure 6-69 Setting Bluetooth Information

    Issue 10.0 6.1.2.7 BT Information You can view the following information about the BHA-L UNIT: Firmware and hardware versions.  Bluetooth module information and standard.  Installed profile versions.  Device address and name.  Figure 6-69 Setting Bluetooth Information ECTION PTIONAL EADSETS...

  • Page 642: Initial Setup

    Issue 10.0 7.1.1 Installing the Base Unit Attach the Base Unit to the stand pegs, and connect the USB connector to a free USB port on your computer. A USB hub can be used, if you are certain that it can supply the required 250mA to charge the headset. An optional AC power adapter can be installed in the AC Power Adapter Port.

  • Page 643: Figure 6-71 Cordless Headset (Mx250)

    (This jack is located next to the handset jack, so make sure to connect to the proper jack.) term ® 7.2.1 NEC D Headset (MX250) The M Series Pin Jack Style headset MX250 allows maximum versatility for wireless or cordless phones. The MX250 is easy to put on and can be worn in either ear.

  • Page 644: Figure 6-72 Cordless Headset (M175)

    NEC D Cordless Phone Headset (M175) The NEC M175 mobile headset offers hands-free convenience anywhere you go. Its convertible design can be worn with a headband or earloop on either ear, depending on whether you want greater stability or convenient small size.

  • Page 645: Figure 6-74 Nec Polaris Mirage

    With no headband, no eartip, no hands, no hassle, these headsets are lightweight and have concert hall acoustics. With its over-the-ear fit and receiver that rests gently against the ear it is easy to forget that it is being worn. Figure 6-74 NEC Polaris Mirage term ® 7.2.5 NEC D NEC P ®...

  • Page 646: Figure 6-76 Nec Polaris Encore

    ❍ Due to the environment where the telephones or headsets are located, ambient noise may affect performance. Please contact NEC for the recommended headset to use with VoIP applications. 6-56 Installing SV9100 Cordless Telephones...

  • Page 647: Figure 7-1 Sip Dect System Configuration

    OLUTIONS The SIP Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication (DECT) is a stand-alone system that is connected to the NEC Telephone System via a TCP/IP connection using Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). This means that in the NEC Telephone System, the DECT extensions must be assigned as SIP extensions. From the NEC Telephone System perspective, there is no difference between an SIP extension and an SIP DECT extension.

  • Page 648: Installation

    (For UNIVERGE SV9100 only) Connect a network cable between the GPZ-IPLE and the IP Switch. The next step is setting up your IP Addressing structure. Refer to the NEC SIP DECT Solutions Technician’s Guide, IP Addressing. Handsets The following are available to the SIP DECT system:...

  • Page 649: Figure 7-2 G955 Wireless Handset

    Issue 10.0 2.2.1 SIP DECT G955 The NEC Philips Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications (DECT) G955 Handset is a cordless telephone with enhanced features suitable for office use. The handsets include a single-press SOS key used to make one-touch calls or send messages to a particular contact number. The G955 DECT Handset offers text-messaging to send and receive messages.

  • Page 650: Table 7-1 G955 Icon Line Icons

    Issue 10.0 Table 7-1 G955 Icon Line Icons Icon Description Level of radio signal Bluetooth connection status (only for G955 DECT Handset) For Bluetooth connection status icons, refer to Table 7-2 G955 Bluetooth Headset Status Icons on page 7-5 New text message received If active, this icon replaces the Bluetooth connection status icon Voice Message waiting indication...

  • Page 651: Table 7-2 G955 Bluetooth Headset Status Icons

    Issue 10.0 Table 7-2 G955 Bluetooth Headset Status Icons Icon Description Connected Disconnected In conversation Table 7-3 G955 Battery Charge Status Icons Icon Description Empty Less than 33% More than 33% and less than 75% More than 75% SV9100 System Hardware Manual...

  • Page 652: Figure 7-4 G955 Handset Controls

    Issue 10.0 Figure 7-4 G955 Handset Controls Installing SV9100 Wireless Telephones...

  • Page 653: Figure 7-5 G266 Wireless Handset

    Issue 10.0 2.2.2 SIP DECT G266 The G266 handset is a standard mobile handset offering a range of professional capabilities, such as a central directory, loudspeaker and personal alarming. The G266 uses an intuitive color display and icon based menus providing a variety of control features integrated with the PBX. The G266 also provides a dual charging capability allowing an additional battery to be charged (refer to Figure 7-5 G266 Wireless...

  • Page 654: Figure 7-6 G266 Battery Charging Display

    Issue 10.0 Set the handset on the charger (refer to Figure 7-5 G266 Wireless Handset on page 7-7). The Charging screen is displayed. Figure 7-6 G266 Battery Charging Display After a few seconds, the Charging display is replaced by the normal display.

  • Page 655: Charging A Spare Battery

    20 hours of talk time and 160 hours of standby time. For detailed instructions on the G266 and G566 handsets, refer to the NEC IP DECT G266 and G566 Handsets User Guide. 2.2.3 SIP DECT G566...

  • Page 656: Figure 7-9 G566 Battery Charging Display

    Issue 10.0 2.2.3.1 Charging the Battery Pack Place the handset face down on a flat surface. Pull the lock at the bottom of the battery compartment cover upward and at the same time shift the cover downwards. Remove the battery compartment cover. Lift the battery pack and remove the battery protective tab.

  • Page 657: Table 7-5 G566 Battery Charge Status Icons

    20 hours of talk time and 160 hours of standby time. For detailed instructions on the G266 and G566 handsets, refer to the NEC IP DECT G266 and G566 Handsets User Guide. SV9100 System Hardware Manual 7-11...

  • Page 658: Figure 7-11 I766 Wireless Handset

    Issue 10.0 2.2.4 SIP DECT I766 The I766 is a robust DECT handset for voice and messaging in demanding environments. The I766 DECT handset is a powerful communication tool and by its ruggedized design ideal for healthcare and other demanding environments Figure 7-11 I766 Wireless Handset 2.2.4.1...

  • Page 659: Charging The Battery

    Completely charged batteries provide the handset with up to 20 hours of talk time and 160 hours of standby time. For detailed instructions on I766 handsets, refer to the NEC IP DECT I766 Handset User Guide. SV9100 System Hardware Manual...

  • Page 660: Figure 7-13 Ml440 Handset - Front View

    Issue 10.0 2.2.5 ML440 The ML440 IP Wireless Handset is an ergonomically designed compact wireless handset for business users who are mobile in the office and want to make and receive wireless calls while in the office. The DECT protocol operates in the 1.9 GHZ frequency band that has been cleared specifically for voice applications, thus avoiding any interference problems and delivering crystal clear and secure voice conversations.

  • Page 661: Figure 7-15 Ml440 - Handset Battery Installation

    Issue 10.0 Figure 7-14 ML440 – Handset Charger 2.2.5.2 Charging the Battery Install the battery (refer to Figure 7-15 ML440 – Handset Battery Installation). Figure 7-15 ML440 – Handset Battery Installation Use the charger AC adapter to connect the charger's AC jack to a standard 120V AC power outlet.

  • Page 662: Figure 7-16 Ml440 - Insert Handset Into Charger

    Issue 10.0 Place the spare battery (if available) in the back section of the charger; the BATTERY STATUS LED should turn on. (Pull the battery latch back slightly to fit the battery in the slot.) Figure 7-16 ML440 – Insert Handset into Charger 2.2.5.3 Powering on the Handset To power up the handset, press and hold End until the display...

  • Page 663: Connecting The Base Station

    Issue 10.0 AP300/AP400 The IP DECT AP300/AP400 Access Points connect directly to the IP network and can be used on both NEC platforms as well as different PBX platforms using a SIP interface. 2.3.1 Connecting the Base Station If your network connection does not provide Power Over...

  • Page 664: Figure 7-18 Install Ap300/Ap400 Base Station

    Issue 10.0 Install the Base Station Connect a standard Ethernet cable (Cat 5 or higher) to the Ethernet/ PoE jack on the rear of the base station. Route the cable through the channel. Figure 7-18 Install AP300/AP400 Base Station Power over Ethernet The DAPs support Power over Ethernet, the so called PoE (described down in IEEE802.3af specification).

  • Page 665: Table 7-6 Dap Rj-45 Pinouts

    Issue 10.0 Table 7-6 DAP RJ-45 Pinouts DAP RJ-45 Socket Pin No. Connection 10/100 Base-T Tx+ 10/100 Base-T Tx- 10/100 Base-T Rx+ +48 Volt power +48 Volt power 10/100 Base-T Rx– RTN (0 Volt) power RTN (0 Volt) power The advantage of Power over Ethernet is that you can provide the DAPs with power from one location only, e.g., same power source as the SV9100.

  • Page 666: Figure 7-19 Views Of Ap20 Base Station

    Issue 10.0 ML440/AP20 ECTION The ML440/AP20 chapter outlines the steps for connecting and mounting the base station, charging the battery, and powering on the handset. Connecting the Base Station If your network connection does not provide Power Over Ethernet, contact customer service to order a base station AC adapter and a standard WARNING Ethernet-to-PoE adapter.

  • Page 667: Figure 7-20 Install Ap20 Base Station

    Issue 10.0 Install the Base Station Connect a standard Ethernet cable (Cat 5 or higher) to the Ethernet/PoE jack on the rear of the base station. Route the cable through the channel. Figure 7-20 Install AP20 Base Station Connect the other end of the cable to your TCP/IP network. When the base station powers on, the STATUS LED on the front briefly lights orange and then turns off while it initializes and connects to the network.

  • Page 668: Base Station Wall Mounting Installation

    Issue 10.0 Table 7-8 Base Station LED States and Meanings (Continued) Color State Meaning Blinking Factory reset warning. A factory reset has been initiated or is in progress. Blinking No Ethernet connection available handset registration failed. Flickering Stage in base flash memory rewrite at the end of the base firmware update.

  • Page 669: Handset And Charger

    Issue 10.0 Insert the appropriate anchors for the wall material. Insert the mounting screws into the anchors, leaving about ¼ inch of space between the screw head and the wall. Connect the Ethernet cable and route the cord (refer to Figure 7-21 Base Station Dimensions on page 7-22).

  • Page 670: Figure 7-24 Ml440 - Handset Battery Installation

    Issue 10.0 Figure 7-23 ML440 – Handset Charger Charging the Battery Install the handset battery as shown. Figure 7-24 ML440 – Handset Battery Installation Use the charger AC adapter to connect the charger's AC jack to a standard 120V AC power outlet. Place the handset in the charger with the display facing forward.

  • Page 671: Figure 7-25 Ml440 - Insert Handset Into Charger

    Issue 10.0 Place the spare battery (if available) in the back section of the charger; the BATTERY STATUS LED should turn on. (Pull the battery latch back slightly to fit the battery in the slot.) Figure 7-25 ML440 – Insert Handset into Charger Powering on the Handset To power up the handset, press and hold End until the display flashes once (about three seconds).
  • Page 672 Issue 10.0 7-26 Installing SV9100 Wireless Telephones...

  • Page 673: Installation

    ECTION ONFERENCE The NEC SIP Conference Max expandable conferencing telephone provides premium, full-duplex audio to small conference rooms as a single unit and to larger rooms as an expanded system. Up to four SIP Conference Max units can be linked, expanding not only microphone coverage but loudspeaker coverage and control access as well.

  • Page 674: Figure 8-1 Nec Sip Conference Installation

    Link Out jack on the first phone and to the Link In jack on the second phone. Up to three additional SIP Conference Max phones for a total of four may be connected. NOTE Figure 8-2 Install Additional NEC SIP Conference Units Installing SV9100 Conference Solutions...

  • Page 675: Table 8-1 Sip Conference Max Keypad Functions

    Issue 10.0 Connecting and Charging the Batteries To connect and charge the batteries: Slide the cover off the battery compartment on the bottom of one pod. Connect the battery pack plug in the port in the compartment and install the battery pack.

  • Page 676: Table 8-2 Sip Conference Max Programming Options

    Issue 10.0 Programming Options To enter Programming mode, press and hold REDIAL until a diamond arrow is displayed on the LCD. Then press the applicable key and follow the instruction in Table 8-2 SIP Conference Max Programming Options. Table 8-2 SIP Conference Max Programming Options Menu Option Programming Ringer Melody...
  • Page 677 Issue 10.0 Compliance This product is in compliance with the following regulations and requirements: FCC Part 15/ICES-003  This product has been tested and complies with the limits for a Class A digital device. FCC Part 68  US:FBIMT01B910158015 Ringer Equivalence Number (REN):0.1B(ac) Industry of Canada (IC) ...
  • Page 678 Issue 10.0 Installing SV9100 Conference Solutions...

  • Page 679: Using A Pgd(2)-U10 Adp

    UNIVERGE ® SV9100 Chapter 9 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment ECTION ENERAL NFORMATION This chapter provides information for installing optional equipment, such as term PGD(2)-U10 ADP, background music, door boxes, DSS consoles, D VSR, external paging as well as other handsets, recording devices and adapters on the SV9100 digital and IP telephones.

  • Page 680: Figure 9-1 Pgd(2)-U10 Adp

    Issue 10.0 The PGD(2)-U10 ADP connects to any available digital extension port. The terminal connections made in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP and the jumper settings determine what features are used for each circuit. Figure 9-1 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Channel 2 Channel 1 Status LED Status LED ❍...

  • Page 681: Figure 9-3 Connection Between Port And Dead Port Numbers

    Issue 10.0 The example in Figure 9-3 Connection Between Port and Dead Port Numbers displays the connection between the port number and the dead port number: Figure 9-3 Connection Between Port and Dead Port Numbers LED Indications Table 9-1 PGD(2)-U10 ADP LED Indications lists the LED indications and provides a brief description of each.

  • Page 682: Figure 9-4 Remove Cover From Pgd(2)-U10 Adp

    Issue 10.0 Remove the screw from the front of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP. Figure 9-4 Remove Cover from PGD(2)-U10 ADP Using a screwdriver, break out the plastic piece covering the cable hole. Figure 9-5 Remove Plastic Cover from Cable Hole Set the S3 – S6 jumpers to the proper settings for the function to be used (refer to Table 9-2 PGD(2)-U10 ADP S3 –...

  • Page 683: Table 9-2 Pgd(2)-U10 Adp S3 - S6 Jumper Settings

    Issue 10.0 Table 9-2 PGD(2)-U10 ADP S3 – S6 Jumper Settings Function LED Indication Open Open Door Box On when in use. Open Short External Paging Speaker On when in use. Channel 1 Short Open External Ringer On when in use. Short Short External Music on Hold /...
  • Page 684 Issue 10.0 Strip one end of the cable to be connected to the control relay or door box so that approximately 1/4” (8mm) of bare wire is exposed. Insert the cable into the proper CN4 or CN5 location while holding down the lock button (holding down this lock button is easiest with a flat-head screwdriver).

  • Page 685: Figure 9-7 Pgd(2)-U10 Adp Connection Diagram

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-7 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Connection Diagram SV9100 System Hardware Manual...

  • Page 686: Figure 9-8 Pgd(2)-U10 Adp Security Connection Diagram

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-8 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Security Connection Diagram Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 687: Figure 9-9 Connecting Cable To The Pgd(2)-U10 Adp

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-9 Connecting Cable to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP Flat-head screwdriver Cable Press down CN4, CN5 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for any additional connection required. Replace the cover and tighten the screw to hold the cover in place. If required for the function being used, insert the RCA connectors into the CN2 (Channel 1) and CN3 (Channel 2) connectors on the back of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP.

  • Page 688: Figure 9-10 Pgd(2)-U10 Adp Connections

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-10 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Connections Install a modular jack for each PGD(2)-U10 ADP. For each module, run one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the cross-connect block to a modular jack. Ground the unused pair. Terminate the extension leads to GRN/RED of the modular jack. Terminate the unused leads to the jack.

  • Page 689: Figure 9-11 Installing The Screws

    Issue 10.0 Optional: To wall mount the PGD(2)-U10 ADP, insert two wood screws 100mm apart (3 15/16”). Leave 3mm (1/8”) of the screw exposed. The screws can be installed either vertical or horizontal, depending on which position fits best for your location. Figure 9-11 Installing the Screws The back of the PGD(2)-U10 ADP has two key-hole type openings.

  • Page 690: Installing Background Music

    Issue 10.0 ECTION ACKGROUND USIC Installing Background Music Background Music (BGM) sends music from a customer-provided music source to speakers in Multiline terminals. If an extension user activates it, BGM plays when the user’s extension is idle. Connecting to the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20: Connect an RCA line from the AUX1 or AUX2 connector on the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 to the appropriate location on the extension cross-connect block.
  • Page 691 Issue 10.0 Each PGD(2)-U10 ADP audio output can optionally support two analog Door Boxes. In addition, you can connect each circuit control relay to an electric door strike. This allows an extension user to remotely activate the door strike while talking to a visitor at the Door Box.

  • Page 692: Figure 9-14 Setting The Pgd(2)-U10 Adp For A Door Box

    Issue 10.0 Box 1) or Relay 6 (for Door Box 2) connectors (CN5) in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP. Connect the opposite end to the unlock device. Refer to section 6.2 Door Box /External Page Relay Contacts on page 9-18 for additional information when using the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 relay. Figure 9-14 Setting the PGD(2)-U10 ADP for a Door Box 9-14 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 693: Figure 9-15 Installing A Door Box

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-15 Installing a Door Box SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-15...

  • Page 694: External Page

    Issue 10.0 ECTION XTERNAL AGING External Page Two external page zone/door box circuits are provided by each PGD(2)-U10 ADP installed. Each Door Box/external page circuit provides a dry relay contact. The GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 also provides a connection for external paging and a relay.

  • Page 695: Figure 9-16 Pgd(2)-U10 Adp Cable Connection

    Issue 10.0 PGD(2)-U10 ADP. Connect the two-conductor station cable from the CN5 connectors in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP to the external relay/external page. Figure 9-16 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Cable Connection The PGD(2)-U10 ADP provides amplifiers for each page output port (for a maximum of +8 dBM, 600 ohms at 1KHz). No additional page amplification is provided by the PGD(2)-U10 ADP but, if required, an external page amplifier can be used for additional amplification.

  • Page 696: Door Box /External Page Relay Contacts

    Issue 10.0 ECTION XTERNAL AGING AND ELAYS External Page Relays Two external dry contact relays are available when a PGD(2)-U10 ADP is installed which can be used to activate ancillary devices (i.e. door unlock devices). The GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 also provides one page relay. When the relay on the PGD(2)-U10 ADP is used, there is no need to assign the relay to the Door Box –...

  • Page 697: Figure 9-17 Gcd-Cp10 Or Gcd-Cp20 Page Connections

    Issue 10.0 Install a modular jack for each PGD(2)-U10 ADP. For each module, run one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the cross-connect block to a modular jack. Ground the unused pair. Terminate the extension leads to GRN/RED of the modular jack. Terminate the unused leads to the jack.

  • Page 698: Installing An External Recording System Or External Ringer

    Issue 10.0 The relays in the PGD(2)-U10 ADP can optionally control customer-provided external ringers (loud bells) and buzzers. When an extension user dials the ACI analog port extension number, the associated PGD(2)-U10 ADP relay closes and activates the ringer. You could use this ability to control an emergency buzzer for a noisy machine shop floor, for example.

  • Page 699: Figure 9-18 Pgd(2)-U10 Adp Cable Connection

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-18 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Cable Connection Programming 10-03-01 : ETU Setup – Terminal Type (Circuit 1)  10-03-06 : ETU Setup – Terminal Type (Circuit 2) Confirm that the PGD(2)-U10 ADP has defined the circuit as either type 7 for External Ringer or 9 for ACIs.
  • Page 700 Issue 10.0 11-08-01 : ACI Group Pilot Number  Assign pilot numbers to ACI groups. When a user dials the pilot number, they reach an available ACI software port in the group. ACI Groups 1 ~ 16 11-12-50 : Service Code Setup (For Service Access) ...

  • Page 701: Music Sources

    Issue 10.0 External Ringer 31-05-01 : Universal Night Answer/Ring Over Paging  For each trunk port which should ring the external ringer, enter 1. ECTION USIC OURCES Music on Hold The system can provide Music on Hold from either an internally synthesized source on the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 or from an external source.

  • Page 702: Figure 9-19 Cpru Connections

    Issue 10.0 If a line cord was not previously connected to the PGD(2)-U10 ADP, complete Steps 3~6. Otherwise, skip to Step 7. Install a modular jack for each PGD(2)-U10 ADP. For each module, run one-pair 24 AWG station cable from the cross-connect block to a modular jack.

  • Page 703: Figure 9-20 Pgd(2)-U10 Adp Connections

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-20 PGD(2)-U10 ADP Connections SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-25...

  • Page 704: Night Mode Selection

    Issue 10.0 ECTION IGHT ELECTION Night Mode Selector Switch The Night Mode Switch relay closes when the system detects either an open or closure on the MISC block NIGHT SW terminals. Maximum 48v DC is output to the switch when open, and 7mA DC when shorted. Connecting a Night Mode Selector Switch Connect an RJ-61 modular line cord from the CN10 connector on the GCD-CP10 or GCD-CP20 to the appropriate location on the extension...

  • Page 705: Figure 9-21 Removing The Faceplate

    Issue 10.0 10.1.1 Removing the Faceplate Use the small notch at the lower right corner of the telephone, to lift the faceplate up. Each corner has a plastic locking pin which releases as the  faceplate is lifted up. Figure 9-21 Removing the Faceplate Replacing the Faceplate Place the faceplate back on the telephone.

  • Page 706: Figure 9-22 D Term Voice Security Recorder

    Voice Security Recorder is a USB device that taps across the digital extension pair of the NEC telephone system allowing digital recording of the telephone user’s conversation. The file created is saved either to the local PC or to a network location, depending on the application blade. This adapter is for use with digital multiline terminals.

  • Page 707: Figure 9-23 Vsr Connection Configuration

    Issue 10.0 11.2.2 Connectors One PC USB connector that provides power and streams all speech  and control channel information to the host PC and desktop software. Two digital telephone line connections that passively tap across the  term digital connection and listen in high impedance mode to the signaling on the line.
  • Page 708 Unplug the line cord from your telephone and connect it to either port on the term VSR unit. term Connect the NEC telephone system to the remaining port on the D unit. You are now ready to record. For Windows 2000 or XP term Using the USB cable provided, connect the USB interface on the D unit to your PC.

  • Page 709: Figure 9-24 Voice Security Recorder Installation-1

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-24 Voice Security Recorder Installation-1 SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-31...

  • Page 710: Figure 9-25 Voice Security Recorder Installation-2

    Issue 10.0 Insert the NEC Installation CD in your CD drive and press Next>. Figure 9-25 Voice Security Recorder Installation-2 If you downloaded the files from the Internet, uncheck the Search removable media box, select the Include this location… box and enter the location where you stored the downloaded files (e.g.

  • Page 711: Figure 9-26 Voice Security Recorder Installation-3

    Voice Security Recorder application software on your PC. Using the USB cable provided, connect the USB interface of the NEC VSR unit to an available USB port on your PC. Unplug the line cord from your telephone and connect the phone to either...

  • Page 712: Figure 9-27 Vsr User Interface Tab Options

    Issue 10.0 The VSR application supports Microsoft Operating Systems that support USB devices. The following systems meet this requirement: Windows 98SE  Windows Millennium Edition (ME)  Win 2000  Windows XP (all variants)   VSR does not support WIN 95 and below, or WIN NT. 11.3.2 VSR User Interface Tab Options VSR has the following tabs to allow the user to select features and options: Playback allows various playback features of recorded conversations.

  • Page 713: Figure 9-28 Vsr Playback Tab

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-28 VSR Playback Tab Figure 9-29 Caller ID or Comment Editor SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-35...
  • Page 714 The user can edit the Caller ID or the Comments field when viewing an existing recording. Caller ID and number dialed are not available on the first release. Check with NEC for release date. NOTE The user can list recordings in order of importance (using exclamation mark) with Caller ID, Time + Date, or duration.

  • Page 715: Figure 9-30 View Levels And Control Recording

    Issue 10.0 11.3.4 VSR Record Tab This tab allows the user to view recording levels and control the recording. Figure 9-30 View Levels and Control Recording The Oscilloscope shows the local and remote levels on the line separately (Microphone is the user level, and speaker is the distant party level). The Caller ID field is for future versions, but information can be entered or overwritten by the user.

  • Page 716: Figure 9-31 Vsr About Tab

    Issue 10.0 11.3.5 About Tab This tab provides version and manufacturer information. Figure 9-31 VSR About Tab 9-38 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 717: Options Tab

    Issue 10.0 11.3.6 Options Tab This tab allows the user to select various setup options of the VSR. Figure 9-32 Select VSR Setup Options Automatically start recording every call  Starts the recording when a call, including an internal extension call, is made.

  • Page 718: Figure 9-33 Manage Calls At Completion

    Issue 10.0 Call Selection  Saves all calls or only those that exceed an established limit. Show splash screen at startup  When selected, the VSR logo is shown for five seconds when the application is started. Email format  Allows the user to select the type of file inserted in an e-mail when the user selects the e-mail button on the Playback Tab to send the VSR format to other users that have this application or to convert it to a...

  • Page 719: Figure 9-34 File Management Tab

    Issue 10.0 11.3.7 File Management Tab File management is necessary when the user makes many telephone calls and stores each conversation. The selections are self-explanatory. Figure 9-34 File Management Tab SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-41...

  • Page 720: Figure 9-35 Comvurgent Options For Additional Adjustments

    Figure 9-35 Comvurgent Options for Additional Adjustments This special configuration program can only be accessed by browsing to the installation location (default C:\Program Files\Comvurgent\XtRecorder), and term then click on the NEC D Config.exe. The customer takes all responsibility to ensure they meet legal requirements.

  • Page 721: Figure 9-36 Customizing Application To Meet Requirements

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-36 Customizing Application to Meet Requirements Display splash screen at the start of each call  Reminds user that recording is taking place by splashing a screen with every call. term Show D Recorder dialog at the start of each call ...

  • Page 722: Figure 9-37 Voice Security Recorder Connection

    Issue 10.0 Password  Locks access to these settings and those at the user level. When changes are made, the application must be closed and started again to become effective. CAUTION Figure 9-37 Voice Security Recorder Connection 11.4 Operation Note term ®...

  • Page 723: Figure 9-38 Digital Call Logging Unit Connection Configuration

    Issue 10.0 11.5 4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit 11.5.1 Description The 4-Port Digital Call Logging Units are Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices installed in the BackOffice next to the telephone system. Up to 12 of the 4-Port Digital Call Logging Units can be connected to a single PC (providing 48 ports).

  • Page 724: Package Contents

     term digital port and listen in high impedance mode to the signaling on the line. The NEC 4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit does not affect the telephone operation in any way with or without connection of the host PC.

  • Page 725: Installation

    Location Preparation The wiring for the extensions should be within six feet of the PC location. For this reason, the PC for the NEC BackOffice Recorder should be located near the MDF for extension wiring. The installer must prepare the wiring to tap off the digital pair with a T-Connect type setup.

  • Page 726: Figure 9-39 4-Port Digital Station Ports

    USB cable and plug the USB cable in the PC. Windows responds with the Found New Hardware wizard. Insert the provided NEC BackOffice CD in the CD drive of the PC. Direct the installation of the driver to Specific Location and specify the Driver folder on the CD.

  • Page 727: Figure 9-40 Recorder Screen

    Issue 10.0 11.5.6.4 Install the 4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit BackOffice Software Insert the NEC BackOffice CD in the CD drive of the PC. Locate the Recorder folder. Click on the Setup.exe file in the Recorder folder. Select Telephone System-Type.

  • Page 728: Figure 9-41 Enter Line Details Dialog Box

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-41 Enter Line Details Dialog Box Name the device (user or extension name). Click on the Browse button to identify the storage location for the device. It is recommended that you create a Master Calls folder with a subfolder for each device.

  • Page 729: Figure 9-42 Recorder Screen

    File then Exit from the Recorder screen menu to save your configuration. The NEC Recorder now records every call to and from the telephones. It is important to use proper procedure to shut down the application and PC when necessary.
  • Page 730 Issue 10.0 11.5.6.5 Choose and Install Player Options Several player options are available with the NEC BackOffice Recording solution. Desktop Player – can be loaded on an individual user’s PC,  giving the user complete access (although restrictions can be applied) to call management; deleting calls, emailing conversations, exporting to wav file, etc.

  • Page 731: Figure 9-43 D Term Vsr Manager Screen

    VSR Manager Screen The second player option is the VSR Manager. Take your call recording environment to the next level with NEC VSR application software. VSR Manager provides advanced visibility, access, retrieval, and playback tools for the VSR Recorder administrators. It provides an intuitive interface for establishing...

  • Page 732: Figure 9-44 Vsr Manager Screen

    Issue 10.0 VSR Manager allows the manager or supervisor to quickly and easily gain access to important calls. Figure 9-44 VSR Manager Screen These two players can be combined in any number of configurations in the company, providing control and management where needed and simple playback in other locations.

  • Page 733: Minimum Software Requirements

    Windows 2000 (recommended latest service pack) Windows 2003 Microsoft .Net Framework 1.1+  If your PC does not meet the above requirements, please contact NEC. VSR IMPORTANT Manager 2.0 can be provided, if upgrading to the minimum requirements is not possible or desirable.
  • Page 734 Issue 10.0 11.6.1.4 Is Microsoft.Net Framework 1.1 Installed? VSR Manager 2.0 requires the Microsoft .Net Framework, which should be installed on your PC prior to installing VSR Manager. If your Windows operating system has been kept updated with Windows Service Packs, the Microsoft .Net Framework 1.1 likely has already been installed.
  • Page 735 Issue 10.0 11.6.3 Install and Register VSR Manager 2.0 In a multi-user operating systems, such as Windows 2000 or Windows XP, applications are generally installed in a folder from which it can be run by all users, such as C:\Program Files. You can only install or uninstall applications if you have administrative privileges on your computer.

  • Page 736: Figure 9-45 D Term Vsr Reporter Pro Screen

    VSR Reporter Pro Screen The second player option is the VSR Reporter Pro. Take your call recording environment to the next level with NEC VSR application software. VSR Reporter Pro provides advanced visibility, access, retrieval, and playback tools for the VSR Recorder administrators.

  • Page 737: Figure 9-46 Vsr Reporter Pro Screen

    Issue 10.0 VSR Reporter Pro allows the manager or supervisor to quickly and easily gain access to important calls. Figure 9-46 VSR Reporter Pro Screen These two players can be combined in any number of configurations within the company, providing control and management where needed and simple playback in other locations.
  • Page 738 Windows 2000 (recommended latest service pack) Windows 2003 Microsoft .Net Framework 1.1+  If your PC does not meet the above requirements, please contact NEC. VSR IMPORTANT Manager 2.0 can be provided, if upgrading to the minimum requirements is not possible or desirable.
  • Page 739 Issue 10.0 11.7.2 Install Your Application Security Key VSR Reporter Pro requires an Application Security Key (a USB dongle which is shipped with the application) to be inserted when the VSR Reporter Pro is running. This unlocks the application and prevents unauthorized use. The VSR Reporter Pro displays messages and halts its processes if the Application Security Key is not found or if the wrong key is inserted.

  • Page 740: Call Logging

    12.1 NEC 1-Port Digital Logging Unit The NEC 1-Port Digital Logging Unit is a USB device that taps across the digital extension pair of the NEC telephone system allowing digital recording of the telephone user’s conversation. The file created is saved either to the local PC or to a network location, depending on the application blade.

  • Page 741: Figure 9-47 1-Port Digital Logging Unit

    This device meets all applicable FCC and UL requirements for this type of communication device. Figure 9-47 1-Port Digital Logging Unit 12.1.1 PC Compatibility The NEC 1-Port Digital Logging unit application supports Microsoft operating systems which support USB devices such as Windows XP and Windows 7. 12.1.2 Connection Configuration...

  • Page 742: Figure 9-48 Vsr Connection Configuration

    Figure 9-48 VSR Connection Configuration Digital Port SV9100 Terminal PC with USB Port NEC 1-Port Digital Logging Unit 12.1.4 Installation The VSR is packaged with everything necessary for installation including: Software CD ...

  • Page 743: Figure 9-49 Hardware Update Welcome Screen

    Issue 10.0 Connect the NEC telephone system to the remaining port on the call logging unit. You are now ready to record. For Windows 7 or XP Using the USB cable provided, connect the USB interface on the NEC 1-Port Digital Logging Unit to your PC. Windows automatically detects the new hardware and starts the New Hardware Wizard.

  • Page 744: Figure 9-50 Hardware Update Screen - Installation Options

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-50 Hardware Update Screen – Installation Options Figure 9-51 Hardware Installation – Logo Testing Screen The software is fully tested, but has not yet been submitted to Microsoft for approval. Press Continue Anyway. Press Finish to close the dialog box. 9-66 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 745: Figure 9-52 User Interface Tab Options

    Run Setup.exe on your NEC Installation CD to install the Voice Security Recorder application software on your PC. Using the USB cable provided, connect the USB interface of the NEC call logging unit to an available USB port on your PC.

  • Page 746: Figure 9-53 Playback Tab

    Issue 10.0 12.1.6.1 Playback Tab This tab allows the user to list and play recorded conversations. A graphical presentation of the volume level of the call with a cursor to indicate the current playback position is displayed. The cursor can be dragged forward or backward to allow rapid selection of the applicable section.

  • Page 747: Figure 9-54 Caller Id Or Comment Editor

    The user can edit the Caller ID or the Comments field when viewing an existing recording. Caller ID and number dialed are not available on the first release. Check with NEC for release date. NOTE The user can list recordings in order of importance (using exclamation mark) with Caller ID, Time + Date, or duration.

  • Page 748: Figure 9-55 Record Tab

    Issue 10.0 12.1.6.2 Record Tab This tab allows the user to view recording levels and control the recording. Figure 9-55 Record Tab The Oscilloscope shows the local and remote levels on the line separately (Microphone is the user level, and speaker is the distant party level).

  • Page 749: Figure 9-56 About Tab

    Issue 10.0 12.1.6.3 About Tab This tab provides version and manufacturer information. Figure 9-56 About Tab SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-71...

  • Page 750: Figure 9-57 Options Tab

    Issue 10.0 12.1.6.4 Options Tab This tab allows the user to select various setup options. Figure 9-57 Options Tab Automatically start recording every call  Starts the recording when a call, including an internal extension call, is made. Recorded format ...

  • Page 751: Figure 9-58 Manage Calls At Completion

    Issue 10.0 Email format  Allows the user to select the type of file inserted in an email when the user selects the email button on the Playback Tab to send the format to other users that have this application or to convert it to a .wav format for replay by any selection automatically adds the Caller ID, time, date and comments fields to any email.

  • Page 752: Figure 9-59 File Management Tab

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-59 File Management Tab 12.1.6.6 Custom Program Settings Comvurgent provides the dealer or user the option of making additional adjustments. Figure 9-60 NEC Options for Additional Adjustments 9-74 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 753: Figure 9-61 Customizing Application To Meet Requirements

    This special configuration program can only be accessed by browsing to the installation location (default C:\Program term Files\NEC\XtRecorder), and then click on the NEC D Config.exe. The customer takes all responsibility to ensure they meet legal requirements. NEC provides the...

  • Page 754: Figure 9-62 Digital Call Logger Connection

    Figure 9-62 Digital Call Logger Connection 12.1.7 Operation Note Use the Options and File Management tabs in the NEC Digital Logging Unit application to adjust the program settings as required (directory for storing messages, message deletion, file format, etc.).

  • Page 755: Figure 9-63 Digital Logging Unit Connection Configuration

    If larger installations are required, multiple PCs can be used with calls being stored on one central drive. Connectivity is accomplished via parallel wiring tapped across the same pair that feeds the telephone. The NEC IP/Digital BackOffice Recorder software (covered later in this manual), allows naming and mapping of each port independently.
  • Page 756 Issue 10.0 12.2.3 Connectors The NEC 4-Port Digital Call Logging Unit USB recording device has four connectors and four LED indicators: One PC USB connector, from which the device derives its power and  streams all speech and control channel information up to the host PC and NEC BackOffice application.

  • Page 757: Installation

    Location Preparation The wiring for the extensions should be within six feet of the PC location. For this reason, the PC for the NEC BackOffice Recorder should be located near the MDF for extension wiring. The installer must prepare the wiring to tap off the digital pair with a T-Connect type setup.

  • Page 758: Figure 9-64 Digital Station Ports

    USB cable in the PC. Windows responds with the Found New Hardware wizard. Insert the provided NEC BackOffice CD in the CD drive of the PC. Direct the installation of the driver to Specific Location and specify the Driver folder on the CD.

  • Page 759: Figure 9-65 D Term Vsr Welcome Screen

    IP and/or TDM calls. To install follow the instructions with screen shot examples below. Download the software from NEC’s FTP site or insert the installation CD included with the Digital Logging Unit’s installation package.

  • Page 760: Figure 9-66 D Term Vsr License Agreement

    Issue 10.0 term Figure 9-66 D VSR License Agreement Read the license agreement. Click Yes to accept. 9-82 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 761: Figure 9-67 D Term Vsr Select Telephone System

    Issue 10.0 term Figure 9-67 D VSR Select Telephone System If in the US and using u-law, select US NEC with SIP only and click Next. SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-83...

  • Page 762: Figure 9-68 D Term Vsr Select License System

    Issue 10.0 term Figure 9-68 D VSR Select License System Select licensing system and click Next. 9-84 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 763: Figure 9-69 D Term Vsr Choose Destination Location

    Issue 10.0 term Figure 9-69 D VSR Choose Destination Location Choose destination then click Next. SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-85...

  • Page 764: Figure 9-70 D Term Vsr Ready To Install The Program

    Issue 10.0 term Figure 9-70 D VSR Ready to Install the Program Click Install. 9-86 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 765: Figure 9-71 D Term Vsr Installation Complete

    Issue 10.0 term Figure 9-71 D VSR Installation Complete Select when to reboot and click Finish. An NEC BackOffice shortcut is now displayed on the desktop. NOTE SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-87...

  • Page 766: Configure Ports

    Issue 10.0 12.2.7 Configure Ports Click on the NEC BackOffice shortcut to launch the port status screen. Figure 9-72 Example of Port Status Screen To view the Options screen, in the icon tray click on the icon then View Options.

  • Page 767: Figure 9-73 Options Tab

    12.2.7.1 Options Tab The Options tab allows the user to configure the Buffer location and Auto Delete settings. NEC recommends selecting ‘Only save calls longer’ and entering 6 in the seconds field. Figure 9-73 Options Tab SV9100 System Hardware Manual...

  • Page 768: Figure 9-74 Port Configuration Tab

    Issue 10.0 12.2.7.2 Port Configuration Tab Allows the user to configure the location where recorded TDM or IP calls are to be stored and the name associated with the recorded file. Ensure the Enable the port for recording box is checked if you want to record.

  • Page 769: Figure 9-75 Caller Id Tab

    Issue 10.0 12.2.7.3 Caller ID Tab This tab contains options for setting audio amplitude level that triggers recording, and silence period before halting recording. Settings in this tab should be set to desired levels. After making the desired changes in this section you should make test calls and check for quality of the recorded call.

  • Page 770: Figure 9-76 Voip Configuration Tab

    VoIP Configuration Tab In this tab select the Network Interface type connected to the monitor port of the data switch. Enter the NEC PBX IP address. Then follow the instructions written on the page itself. As the name implies this tab is only relevant for recording VoIP calls.

  • Page 771: Figure 9-77 Licensing Tab

    ❍ The Recorder PC should be left on at all times (with battery backup) and the application running. NEC recommends turning Off power save ❍ functions on the PC hosting BackOffice. Figure 9-77 Licensing Tab SV9100 System Hardware Manual...

  • Page 772: Figure 9-78 Ir Recorder Connectivity

    Choose and Install Player Options Several player options are available with the NEC BackOffice Recording solution. NEC IP/Digital Player – can be loaded on an individual  user’s PC, giving the user complete access (although restrictions can be applied) to call management; deleting calls, emailing conversations, exporting to wav file, etc.

  • Page 773: Minimum Hardware Requirements

    Call Logging product. For detailed assistance with the software, refer to the Help Files located in the Call Logging product program. All NEC IP/Digital Call Logging products for listening require the same minimal PC standards. 12.3.1 Hardware and Software Requirements 12.3.1.1...
  • Page 774 Not sure if.Net is installed: If you have any doubt, try to install NEC IP/Digital Manager. The installation halts and informs you if the Microsoft.Net Framework 2.0 is not found. If this occurs, you can download the Microsoft.Net Framework 2.0, install it, restart your computer and...

  • Page 775: Figure 9-79 D Term Vsr Player - Welcome Screen

    Those three playback options are described in greater detail below. The NEC IP/Digital Player is used by an individual user to play back their own archive of calls or to play back NEC IP/Digital BackOffice calls stored on their PC or network drive.

  • Page 776: Figure 9-80 D Term Vsr Player - License Agreement

    Issue 10.0 Click Next the License Agreement screen opens. term Figure 9-80 D VSR Player – License Agreement 9-98 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 777: Figure 9-81 D Term Vsr Player - Choose Destination Location

    Issue 10.0 Select Yes, the Choose Destination Location screen opens. term Figure 9-81 D VSR Player – Choose Destination Location SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-99...

  • Page 778: Figure 9-82 D Term Vsr Player - Choose Data Folder

    Issue 10.0 Click Next, the Choose Data Folder screen is displayed. term Figure 9-82 D VSR Player – Choose Data Folder 9-100 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 779: Figure 9-83 D Term Vsr Player - Ready To Install The Program

    Issue 10.0 Click Next, the Ready to Install the Program screen is displayed. term Figure 9-83 D VSR Player – Ready to Install the Program SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-101...

  • Page 780: Figure 9-84 D Term Vsr Player - Wizard Complete Screen

    Figure 9-84 D VSR Player – Wizard Complete Screen Select Finish. For detailed instructions setting up and using this product, refer to the documentation included with the NEC IP/Digital Player or contact your product manager. NOTE 9-102 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 781: Figure 9-85 Playback Tab

    12.5 NEC IP/Digital Manager Installation The NEC IP/Digital Manager provides advanced visibility, access, retrieval, and playback tools for the NEC BackOffice administrators. It also provides an intuitive interface for establishing shortcuts to any number of storage folders and allows the supervisor to search across all storage folders for specific call information such as User, Time/Date, Length of Call, etc.

  • Page 782: Figure 9-86 Play History Tab

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-86 Play History Tab These players can be combined in any number of configurations in the company, providing control and management where needed and simple playback in other locations. 9-104 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 783: Figure 9-87 D Term Vsr Call Manager - Select License Manager System (Lms)

    Issue 10.0 12.5.1 Installing the NEC IP/Digital Manager Administrative privileges required for installation. IMPORTANT Insert the Manager CD in the computer CD ROM drive or navigate to the location where you have saved your application download. term Double-click on the Setup.exe icon, the D VSR Call Manager Welcome screen is displayed.

  • Page 784: Figure 9-88 D Term Vsr Call Manager - License Agreement Screen

    Issue 10.0 Click Next, the License Agreement screen opens. term Figure 9-88 D VSR Call Manager – License Agreement Screen 9-106 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 785: Figure 9-89 D Term Vsr Call Manager - Choose Destination Location Screen

    Issue 10.0 Select Yes, the Choose Destination Location screen opens. term Figure 9-89 D VSR Call Manager – Choose Destination Location Screen SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-107...

  • Page 786: Figure 9-90 D Term Vsr Call Manager - Ready To Install The Program Screen

    Issue 10.0 Click Next, the Ready to Install the Program screen is displayed. term Figure 9-90 D VSR Call Manager – Ready to Install the Program Screen 9-108 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 787: Figure 9-91 D Term Vsr Call Manager - Wizard Complete Screen

    Issue 10.0 Click Install, a screen displaying installation progress is displayed. When installation completes, a Wizard Complete screen opens. term Figure 9-91 D VSR Call Manager – Wizard Complete Screen Select Finish. SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-109...

  • Page 788: Figure 9-92 D Term Vsr Call Manager - Select License Manager System (Lms)

    Issue 10.0 12.5.2 Install Call Manager License The method of licensing (License Manager System (LMS)) can be used with the SV9100 system. 12.5.2.1 License Manager System This method requires the license to be loaded on the SV9100 and the call logging application configured to retrieve license information from the PBX.

  • Page 789: Figure 9-93 Usb Key Error - Call Manager

    Double-click on the D VSR Call Manager icon. 12.5.2.2 USB Dongle This method requires the use of a NEC IP/Digital application security key (USB dongle shipped with the application) and inserted when the Manager is running. ❍ The Application Security Key is associated with your Software license.

  • Page 790: Figure 9-94 D Term Vsr Call Manager - Select Usb Dongle

    Found New Hardware is displayed then Hardware successfully installed. If Windows does not locate the driver, browse to the CD or download from NEC site. Drivers are located on the CD in the Driver folder. Click Next. The Call Manager application launches.

  • Page 791: Figure 9-95 Nec Ip/Vsr Reporter Pro

    Issue 10.0 12.6 NEC IP/Digital Reporter Pro Installation The NEC IP/Digital Reporter Pro is NECs most feature rich product for listening to recorded phone calls. It has functionality much the same as the Manager but offers additional features. These additional features make management easier by providing tools to help gather data and generate reports.

  • Page 792: Figure 9-96 Vsr Reporter Pro

    Issue 10.0 IP/Digital Reporter Pro allows the manager or supervisor to quickly and easily gain access to important calls. Figure 9-96 VSR Reporter Pro 9-114 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 793: Figure 9-97 D Term Vsr Reporter Pro - Welcome Screen

    Issue 10.0 12.6.1 Installing the IP/Digital Reporter Pro Administrative privileges required for installation. IMPORTANT Insert the Reporter Pro CD in the computer CD ROM drive or navigate to the location where you have saved your application download. term Double-click on the Setup.exe icon, the D VSR Reporter Pro Welcome screen is displayed.

  • Page 794: Figure 9-98 D Term Vsr Reporter Pro - License Agreement

    Issue 10.0 Click Next, the License Agreement screen opens. term Figure 9-98 D VSR Reporter Pro – License Agreement 9-116 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 795: Figure 9-99 D Term Vsr Reporter Pro - Choose Destination Screen

    Issue 10.0 Select Yes, the Choose Destination Location screen opens. term Figure 9-99 D VSR Reporter Pro – Choose Destination Screen SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-117...

  • Page 796: Figure 9-100 D Term Vsr Reporter Pro - Ready To Install The Program

    Issue 10.0 Click Next, the Ready to Install the Program screen is displayed. term Figure 9-100 D VSR Reporter Pro – Ready to Install the Program 9-118 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 797: Figure 9-101 D Term Vsr Reporter Pro - Wizard Complete

    Issue 10.0 Click Install, a screen displaying installation progress is displayed. When installation completes, a Wizard Complete screen opens. term Figure 9-101 D VSR Reporter Pro – Wizard Complete Select Finish. SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-119...

  • Page 798: Figure 9-102 Usb Key Error - Reporter Pro

    Shut down and relaunch the application. 12.6.2.2 USB Dongle This method requires the use of a NEC IP/Digital application security key (USB dongle shipped with the application) and inserted when Reporter Pro is running. Insert the USB dongle into an available USB port on the PC.

  • Page 799: Telephone Adapters

    Issue 10.0 Click Next. The Reporter application launches. ❍ The Application Security Key is associated with your Software license. CAUTION ❍ The Application Security Key is non-transferable and cannot be replaced if lost. ❍ If the key becomes damaged within the warranty period, you must return your key to support for verification and replacement if the nature of the damage...

  • Page 800: Figure 9-104 In-Line Power Adapter

    The ILPA does the negotiation and detection with the switch and then relays the power to the IP terminal device. This provides an additional way to power the NEC IP terminals. With this adapter, the IP terminals on the UNIVERGE SV9100 system can be powered using: Local power connecting the IP terminal to a local AC wall outlet using the ...

  • Page 801: Figure 9-105 In-Line Power Adapter Switch Settings

    SW1 Setting IEEE802.3af STD System Cisco Discovery Protocol System NEC BlueFire 200/24 Switch Set the switch setting on the NEC IPhone or IP adapter to the correct position. IPhone (SW2) or IP Adapter (SW1) SW Setting NEC Power Patch Panel...

  • Page 802: Figure 9-106 Nec Terminal Connection To An Ieee 802.3Af Poe Switch

    Issue 10.0 Connect the NEC VoIP telephone to the TEL connector on the ILPA-R adapter with the LAN cable provided with the adapter. If a customer-provided cable is used, the total length from the  switch to the telephone should be less than 328 feet.
  • Page 803 Issue 10.0 13.3 ADA-L UNIT Using the ADA-L UNIT (Ancillary Device Adapter) provides a recording jack connection from a telephone to an external tape recorder, speaker or PC. Both sides of the conversation are recorded. The adapter output is a 1/8” audio (stereo) jack which you can connect directly to an AUX level input on a recorder or page amplifier.

  • Page 804: Table 9-3 Ada-L Unit Switch Settings

    Issue 10.0 To provide control to the recorder or to enable/disable the record start warning tones, refer to Table 9-3 ADA-L UNIT Switch Settings. Table 9-3 ADA-L UNIT Switch Settings Switch Description/Settings DSW 1 Record Confirmation Tone Switches On = Tone On (Default) (DSW) Off = Tone Off DSW 2...

  • Page 805: Figure 9-108 Separate Tilt Leg From Leg Support

    Issue 10.0 13.3.2 Installing the ADA-L UNIT (DTL/DTZ/ITL/ITZ Terminals) Perform the following steps to connect the ADA-L UNIT to the Bottom Option Interface located underneath the DTL/DTZ/ITL/ITZ multiline terminal. Only ONE ADA-L UNIT can be installed at a time. IMPORTANT To prevent possible damage to the ADA-L UNIT or the DTL/ DTZ/ITL/ITZ multiline terminal during installation or WARNING...

  • Page 806: Figure 9-109 Bottom Option Interface Knockout

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-109 Bottom Option Interface Knockout Knockout Bottom Option Interface Using the exposed Bottom Option Interface as a guide, install the ADA-L UNIT in the bottom of the DTL/DTZ/ITL/ITZ multiline terminal. Push down until left and right tabs are seated (Refer to Figure 9-110 Install ADA-L UNIT).

  • Page 807: Figure 9-111 Remove Knockout Cover

    Issue 10.0 To prevent possible damage to the ADA-L UNIT or the DTK/ ITK multiline terminal during installation or removal, WARNING disconnect the line cord/LAN cable and the AC/DC adapter from the DTK/ITK multiline terminal. Unplug the line cord from the multiline terminal. Turn the DTK/ITK multiline terminal upside down and spread legs.

  • Page 808: Ada-L Unit Connection For Recording Only

    Issue 10.0 Return tilt legs to original position. Reconnect all cables previously disconnected. 13.3.4 ADA-L UNIT Connection The mini-plug connection cord should not use an attenuator. Use a monaural (single ring) mini-plug connection for normal recording. CAUTION 13.3.4.1 ADA-L UNIT Connection for Recording Only Set the ADA-L UNIT DSW switches (Refer to Figure 9-107 ADA-L UNIT on page...

  • Page 809: Figure 9-114 Ada-L In Jack Connection

    Issue 10.0 Using the mini-plug connection cord, connect the ADA-L Unit IN jack to the recording device EAR PHONE jack (Refer Figure 9-114 ADA-L IN Jack Connection). Figure 9-114 ADA-L IN Jack Connection 13.3.4.3 Send a Startup (REMOTE) Signal to the Recorder Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw from the ADA-L UNIT.
  • Page 810 Issue 10.0 Figure 9-116 ADA-L Cable Opening 13.4 APR-L UNIT The APR-L UNIT (Analog Port Ringer) provides an analog interface for the terminal. The APR-L UNIT adapter provides ringing which allows the connected device to be used for incoming and outgoing calls. This adapter also provides a separate extension number for the analog device, which allows both devices to be used at the same time (this can be removed in system programming if you wish).

  • Page 811: Apr-L Unit Switch Settings

    Issue 10.0 13.4.1 APR-L UNIT Switch Settings Figure 9-117 APR-L UNIT shows the location of the switches. The DIP switches (DSW) allow a technician to configure the unit for specific settings. Due to the location of the switches, set switches prior to installation of ADA-L UNIT on DTK/DTL/DTZ/ITK/ITL/ITZ multiline terminal.

  • Page 812: Figure 9-118 Separate Tilt Leg From Leg Support

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-118 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support Stoppers Tilt Leg Push the two stopper tabs through the slots to separate the tilt leg from the leg support. Lay the tilt leg and the leg support flat to expose APR-L UNIT compartment.

  • Page 813: Figure 9-120 Install Apr-L Unit

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-120 Install APR-L UNIT Return tilt leg to original position. For the APR adapter to be recognized correctly, before plugging in the multiline terminal, make sure the extension number to be used for the adapter is undefined in Program 10-03-01. Plug the line cord back into the multiline terminal.

  • Page 814: Psa-L (Bk) Unit / Psa-L (Wh) Unit

    Issue 10.0 13.5 PSA-L (BK) UNIT / PSA-L (WH) UNIT The PSA-L UNIT (Power Save Adapter), an optional adapter for the ITL/DTL Terminals, is used with IP telephones to make or receive a call using the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) when a call cannot be made or received using the Local Area Network (LAN).

  • Page 815: Figure 9-122 Psa-L Unit Connections

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-122 PSA-L UNIT Connections PSTN DTMF/DP 13.5.1 Installing the PSA-L Adapter BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING the PSA-L adapter, remove the line cord, LAN cable, and then AC adapter from the WARNING outlet. Turn multiline terminal upside down. Unplug the line cord and handset cord from the multiline terminal.

  • Page 816: Figure 9-123 Separate Tilt Leg From Leg Support

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-123 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support Stoppers Tilt Leg Push the two stopper tabs through the slots to separate the tilt leg from the leg support. Lay the tilt leg and the leg support flat. Press the two tabs locking the legs to the multiline terminal and pull the legs toward you, lifting to remove (refer to Figure 9-124 Remove Legs From Multiline...

  • Page 817: Figure 9-125 Bottom Of Multiline Terminal (Legs Removed)

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-125 Bottom of Multiline Terminal (Legs Removed) Latch Fit the projections on the side of the PSA-L UNIT into the guide holes on the side of the terminal and pull toward you until the PSA-L UNIT snaps into place. Figure 9-126 Attach PSA-L UNIT to the Multiline Terminal SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-139...

  • Page 818: Figure 9-121 Psa-L Unit

    Issue 10.0 Gently press the serial cable into the grooved cutout for the cable. Figure 9-127 Grooved Cutout for Serial Cable Cable Groove Connect the serial connection cord (refer to Figure 9-126 Attach PSA-L UNIT to the Multiline Terminal on page 9-139) from the PSA-L UNIT to the terminal body.

  • Page 819: Figure 9-129 Insert Connector For Handset Use

    Issue 10.0 For the Handset, set the connector in place. Figure 9-129 Insert Connector for Handset Use If using the handset, install the handset cable (refer to Figure 9-130 Insert Handset Cable). Figure 9-130 Insert Handset Cable SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-141...

  • Page 820: Figure 9-131 Remove Plastic Panels

    Issue 10.0 Attach the analog trunk cable and the handset cable. Refer to Figure 9-122 PSA-L UNIT Connections on page 9-137. Install the legs, pushing upwards until both locks snap into place. Return tilt leg to desired position. Place the multiline terminal numbered keypad up. Connect the Line cord, the PSTN cable and the Handset cord (if used).

  • Page 821: Figure 9-133 Install Numbered Keypad

    Issue 10.0 Install the new keypad panel supplied with the PSA-L UNIT. Figure 9-133 Install Numbered Keypad Install both plastic panels to the front of the multiline terminal (refer to Figure 9-134 Install Plastic Panels). Figure 9-134 Install Plastic Panels Connect the line cord to the adapter.

  • Page 822: Using The Psa-L Adapter

    Issue 10.0 13.5.2 Using the PSA-L Adapter BEFORE INSTALLING OR REMOVING the PSA-L adapter, remove the line cord, LAN cable, and then AC adapter from the WARNING outlet. Placing Calls: When the PSTN line is activated either manually by the switch or due to a power failure, use the dial pad buttons (0-9, *, #) to place an ...

  • Page 823: Installing The Gba-L Unit

    Issue 10.0 13.6 Gigabit Adapter (GBA-L UNIT) The GBA-L UNIT enables IP telephones (DT730/DT750) to operate in a Gigabit Ethernet environment. A single Gigabit Ethernet desktop drop provides a 10/ 100Mbps to the IP telephone and a gigabit connection to a personal computer. The Gigabit Adapter is installed on the bottom of the IP telephone and offers a gigabit interface to the LAN side and PC port.

  • Page 824: Figure 9-136 Separate Tilt Leg From Leg Support

    Issue 10.0 Lower the tilt leg to the first position (refer to Figure 9-136 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support). Figure 9-136 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support Stoppers Tilt Leg Push the two stopper tabs through the slots to separate the tilt leg from the leg support.

  • Page 825: Figure 9-138 Attach The Lan Cable

    Issue 10.0 Plug in the LAN cable and gently press the cable into the grooved cutout (refer to Figure 9-138 Attach the LAN Cable). Figure 9-138 Attach the LAN Cable Plug in the DC power cable and gently press the cable into the grooved cutout (refer to Figure 9-139 Attach the DC Power Cable).

  • Page 826: Figure 9-140 Align Bracket With Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Assemble the legs and bracket then align with tab holes (refer to Figure 9-140 Align Bracket with Terminal). Figure 9-140 Align Bracket with Terminal Pass the LAN and DC power cables through the bracket (refer to Figure 9-141 Pass Cabling Through Bracket).

  • Page 827: Figure 9-142 Secure Bracket To Terminal

    Issue 10.0 Slide the supporting bracket forward until a click is heard (refer to Figure 9-142 Secure Bracket to Terminal). Figure 9-142 Secure Bracket to Terminal Secure base of GBA-L UNIT to bracket assembly (refer to Figure 9-143 Secure GBA-L UNIT Base to Bracket Assembly).

  • Page 828: Figure 9-144 Ip Phone(X) Connection

    Issue 10.0 Install the NEC provided Cat 5 Ethernet cable (refer to Figure 9-144 IP Phone(X) Connection). Figure 9-144 IP Phone(X) Connection Install the NEC provided Cat 5 Ethernet cable (refer to Figure 9-145 PC(X) Connection). Figure 9-145 PC(X) Connection...

  • Page 829: Figure 9-146 Dc Power Connection

    Issue 10.0 Install the NEC provided power cable (refer to Figure 9-146 DC Power Connection). Figure 9-146 DC Power Connection Connect the Core then plug in the Network connection cable (refer to Figure 9-147 LAN(=) Connection). Figure 9-147 LAN(=) Connection...

  • Page 830: Figure 9-148 Ac To Dc In Connection

    Issue 10.0 Install the cable from the optional external AC adapter (refer to Figure 9-148 AC to DC In Connection). The AC Adapter (AC-L UNIT/AC-Z UNIT) must be ordered separately. IMPORTANT Figure 9-148 AC to DC In Connection Cable installation for the GBA-L UNIT complete (refer to Figure 9-149 GBA-L UNIT Installed).

  • Page 831: Gba-L Unit Connection

    Issue 10.0 13.6.2 GBA-L UNIT Connection The following chart outlines the connectivity available to the GBA-L UNIT: Figure 9-150 GBA-L UNIT Connectivity Chart 13.6.3 LED Display The following provides a list of each LED and associated operation and status indications. Refer to Figure 9-151 GBA-L UNIT LED Display on page 9-154 for the location of the LEDs on the GBA-L UNIT.

  • Page 832: System Power

    VLAN tagging and packet QoS information is retained across the VPN. System Power The NEC Concentrator chassis is typically mounted in a 19” rack and powered by a standard 120vac power source. The IP6-L Adapter snaps onto the back of NEC’s DT700 Series VoIP phones and draws electrical power from the telephone.

  • Page 833: Connection Types

    Issue 10.0 PC Compatibility The PC is used to connect to and configure the Concentrator and the Adapter. A PC or laptop with either Windows XP or Windows 7 can be used. Connection Types The IPv6 can be installed using a Routed or Remote connection. IPv6 only Routed Network –...

  • Page 834: Figure 9-154 Example Of Port Names

    Issue 10.0 13.7.1 Installation The NEC IP6-L Adapter snaps into the back of the phone and converts IPv6 network traffic into IPv4 for communication with the telephone. The NEC Concentrator handles the IPv4 to IPv6 communication, but also contains SSL security certificates for the Concentrator and the telephone.

  • Page 835: Network Settings

    Issue 10.0 13.7.2 Concentrator Installation and Configuration After connecting and logging in via the browser to the Concentrator, a Configuration Menu is displayed on the left hand side of the main screen listing general system information. Below are the configuration menu parameters required to support connectivity through the Concentrator.
  • Page 836 13.7.3 IP6-L Adapter Installation and Configuration The IP6-L adapter snaps onto the back of an NEC DT700 Series VoIP telephone and then connected to the telephone LAN port. The network cable is inserted into the RJ45 port on the IPV6-L adapter.

  • Page 837: Figure 9-156 Wfa-Z Adapter Dip Switches

    14 NEC DT700/DT800 W ECTION IRELESS DAPTER This section provides information about the NEC DT700 Wireless (Wi-Fi) Adapter for IP terminals. 14.1 Wireless Adapter (WFA-Z) The NEC DT700/DT800 Wireless (Wi-Fi) Adapter installs in the expansion slot underneath the DT700/DT800 series terminal and draws power from the phone connector.

  • Page 838: Table 9-5 Wfa-Z Adapter Switch Settings

    Not Used DSW 4 On = Default 14.1.2 Installing the NEC DT700/DT800 Wireless (Wi-Fi) Adapter Perform the following steps to connect the WFA-Z Adapter to the Bottom Option Interface located underneath the ITL multiline terminal. Only one Wi-Fi adapter can be installed at a time.

  • Page 839: Figure 9-157 Separate Tilt Leg From Leg Support

    Issue 10.0 Lower the tilt leg to the first position (refer to Figure 9-157 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support). Figure 9-157 Separate Tilt Leg from Leg Support Stoppers Tilt Leg Push the two stopper tabs through the slots to separate the tilt leg from the leg support.

  • Page 840: Figure 9-159 Install Wfa-Z Adapter

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-159 Install WFA-Z Adapter 14.1.3 Wi-Fi Adapter Connection Connect the Adapter’s PH port (using the short cable attached) to the LAN port on the phone (refer to Figure 9-160 Connecting the WFA-Z Adapter). Figure 9-160 Connecting the WFA-Z Adapter Reconnect all cables previously disconnected.

  • Page 841: Led Indicators

    Issue 10.0 14.2 LED Indicators Two LEDs are visible from the Wi-Fi Adapter when it is installed in the DT700. These LEDs provide a quick indication of the current mode of the Adapter. Figure 9-161 Wi-Fi and Status LEDs shows the LEDs, as they appear on the adapter, and which LED is the Wi-Fi LED and which one is the Status LED.

  • Page 842: Default Configuration

    Switch #4 being On 14.3.1.2 Logging into the Adapter The NEC Wi-Fi Adapter Application is configured using an Internet browser. Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher is recommended. The Login screen allows a technician to enter their user name and password for network access.

  • Page 843: Logout Page

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-162 Login Screen 14.3.1.3 Logout Page To end the session, select the Administration tab and click Logout. A confirmation message displays. Click OK to log out. The Login page displays. If the browser's Refresh button is pressed, it will end the current session.

  • Page 844: Figure 9-164 Wireless Status Page

    Issue 10.0 14.3.1.4 Wireless Status The Wireless Status page shows current Wi-Fi connection status information. This page is the home page for the Wi-Fi Adapter. Figure 9-164 Wireless Status Page 9-166 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 845: Figure 9-165 Wireless Networks - Refresh List

    Issue 10.0 Selecting the View Available Networks button from the drop- down menu will scan for available Wi-Fi networks. The networks displayed can be refreshed by clicking the Refresh List button. Figure 9-165 Wireless Networks – Refresh List 14.3.1.5 Wireless Configuration Wireless Configuration allows Wi-Fi network setup including security type, authentication, encryption, etc.

  • Page 846: Figure 9-166 Environment Backup/Restore

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-166 Environment Backup/Restore The IP Configuration page allows local network access setup. The wireless port IP address can be statically assigned, or obtained from a DHCP server that is on the connected wireless network. DHCP mode can only be selected if the Wi-Fi Adapter is in Bridged mode.

  • Page 847: Figure 9-168 System Logs

    Issue 10.0 14.3.1.6 Administration The System Logs page displays syslog information, and optionally sets a Syslog remote server and / or TFTP server to send Syslog remotely. Syslog verbosity is configurable. Figure 9-168 System Logs If NAT Traversal mode is used on the phone, and the phone is set for Static IP mode, then the NAT Static Route Enable check box should to be checked.

  • Page 848: Figure 9-170 Factory Default Settings

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-170 Factory Default Settings The Manual Reset resets the Wi-Fi Adapter. This will not reset the DT700/DT800. NOTE Figure 9-171 Manual Reset 14.3.2 CygWCT Utility Use the CygWCT utility software to prepare the Wi-Fi Adapter’s configuration settings and save to a flash drive. Two configuration files are created: Wpa_supplicant.conf contains the wireless configuration settings (SSID, PSK, etc.) and sysconfig_env contains the local management address information and other miscellaneous settings.

  • Page 849: Figure 9-172 Wi-Fi Config Tab

    Issue 10.0 This section will list the system requirements and will provide instructions for installing the CygWCT program. 14.3.2.1 Wi-Fi Configuration Tab Selecting the Wi-Fi Config tab allows the installer to configure the Wi-Fi Adapter wireless network credentials. Figure 9-172 Wi-Fi Config Tab Figure 9-172 Wi-Fi Config Tab shows the Wi-Fi Configuration tab which is the first tab that is presented when the application...

  • Page 850: Figure 9-173 Removable Drives Not Detected

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-173 Removable Drives Not Detected The fields displayed in Figure 9-172 Wi-Fi Config Tab on page 9-171 are explained below: SSID: The wireless network you wish the adapter to join  should be installed. Security Type: Select the security type of the wireless ...
  • Page 851 Issue 10.0 Client Certificate: If EAP-TLS is used for authentication,  the certificate for the client is selected here. Click the Browse button to locate the client certificate. The file must be in .pem format. Client Private Key: If EAP-TLS is used for authentication, ...

  • Page 852: Figure 9-174 Local Ip Config Tab

    Issue 10.0 When the Wi-Fi adapter is in non-bridged mode, the LAN port is not available. Connecting devices to the LAN port while the Wi-Fi adapter is set to non-bridged mode may cause the access point to reject the connection. Next >>: Click on the Next button to proceed to the Local IP ...
  • Page 853 Issue 10.0 The fields displayed in Figure 9-174 Local IP Config Tab on page 9-174 are explained below: Wireless Port: The wireless port has the option of being  configured by DHCP or assigned a static IP address. The wireless port is also used for establishing the date and time with NTP.

  • Page 854: Power Failure

    Issue 10.0 NAT Gateway: IP address of the gateway to which the SIP packets will be routed through. This address should be on the same subnet as the IP Terminal's address. Firmware Update Tab: The firmware update tab allows the ...

  • Page 855: Table 9-8 Rj-61 Cable Connector

    Issue 10.0 15.2 Connector Pin-Outs on GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A Blade for Power Failure Circuits Table 9-8 RJ-61 Cable Connectorprovides the pin-outs for the RJ-61 cable connector. Table 9-8 RJ-61 Cable Connector RJ-61 Cable Connector - CN3, SLT Interface for Power Failure Pin No.

  • Page 856: Figure 9-175 Power Failure Connector (Cn3) Shown On Gcd-4Cotb Or Gcd-4Cotb-A Blade

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-175 Power Failure Connector (CN3) Shown on GCD-4COTB or GCD-4COTB-A Blade 9-178 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 857: Figure 9-176 Ivr Server Chassis - Front View

     This server connects to the SV9100 through Standard SIP Ports and requires the IPLE to be installed in the SV9100. NEC recommends the server and the SV9100 be plugged into the same managed data switch. 16.1 IVR Server Chassis 16.1.1 Front View...

  • Page 858: Figure 9-177 Ivr Server Chassis - Rear View

    Issue 10.0 Table 9-9 External Server – LED Indications (Continued) Condition Comments Indication Indicates channel activity for all hard drives. Indicates power is being supplied to the systems This LED should normally power supply units. be illuminated when the system is operational. The reset button, which is used to reboot the system.
  • Page 859 Issue 10.0 Figure 9-178 IVR Server Chassis – Input/Output Ports Table 9-10 External Server – Available Ports Number Port Type Comments Keyboard Port PS/2 Mouse USB Port 1 USB Port 2 COM Port 1 VGA Port LAN Port 1 Eth0 LAN Port 2 Eth1 16.2 System Specifications...
  • Page 860 Issue 10.0 SATA Controller On-chip (ICH9R) 3 Gb/s Intel SATA controller Hard Drive Support Up to two internal 2.5" drives or one internal 3.5" drive PCI Expansion Slots One PCI-E x4 card (in a x16 slot) Motherboard X7SPA-HF (mini ITX) Dimensions: 6.75 x 6.75 in (171.5 x 171.5 mm) Chassis SC502L-200B (mini 1U Rack mount)

  • Page 861: Ip Video Doorphone

    Perchlorate warning applies only to products containing CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells. “Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.” For more information refer to: ❍ UNIVERGE SV9100 IVR – Appointment Reminder Server REFERENCE Configuration Guide. ❍ UNIVERGE SV9100 IVR – Broadcast Server Configuration...

  • Page 862: Local Setting (Web Setting)

    Issue 10.0 17.1.1 Local Setting (Web Setting) Local Setting of the IP Video Doorphone is completed using a PoE Switch and PC for the following connections. Figure 9-179 IP Video Doorphone Configuration 17.1.2 System Connections Connect the IP Video Doorphone and IPLE via the PoE Switch. The image view of the IP Video Doorphone is displayed in the PC using DR-Viewer or can be displayed on a Polycom VVX1500 terminal.

  • Page 863: Figure 9-181 Ip Video Doorphone

    Issue 10.0 17.2 IP Video Doorphone and Options IP Video Doorphone (IP3NE-IPCDH) and available options are described in this section. IP Video Doorphone (IP3NE-IPCDH) Figure 9-181 IP Video Doorphone Wall Mount Bracket (IP3WW-CDH BRACKET SET Provides protection of Doorphone body. Figure 9-182 Wall Mount Bracket Set SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-185...

  • Page 864: Figure 9-183 Wall Cover Set

    Issue 10.0 Wall Cover (IP3WW-CDH WALL COVER SET) Used for flush mount of the Doorphone body. Figure 9-183 Wall Cover Set 9-186 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 865: Location Of Controls

    Issue 10.0 17.3 Location of Controls Figure 9-184 IP Doorphone Controls SV9100 System Hardware Manual 9-187...

  • Page 866: Installation Information

    Issue 10.0 17.4 Before Installing the IP Video Doorphone 17.4.1 Precautionary Information Observe the following warnings during installation: ❍ Power off the PoE Switch (PoE feeding 48V) during WARNING installation, and disconnect the LAN cable from the PoE Switch – Electric shock may occur. Do not connect /disconnect the LAN cable if hands are wet ❍...

  • Page 867: Figure 9-186 Angle Of View

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-186 Angle of View Figure 9-187 Viewing Field by Height When attaching the IP Video Doorphone to a wall, recommend the  upper, right and left sides be sealed using a water resistant agent such as silicon. Do not seal the lower part of the unit, the drain hole on the bottom ...

  • Page 868: Figure 9-188 Sky Background

    Issue 10.0 Due to possible effects on images transmitted by the doorphone unit,  do not install in the following environments: If a strong light is shining on the door phone station, the visitor’s face may not be distinguishable. Place where most of the background uses the open sky. ...

  • Page 869: Figure 9-191 Lighting Equipment

    Issue 10.0 For a clearer image during night time viewing, install lighting  equipment near the Video Doorphone. Figure 9-191 Lighting Equipment When the door phone is used for room monitor, do not install the extension terminals near the door phone, feedback may be present 17.4.3 General Precautions To avoid shock or equipment damage, do not plug in or turn the...

  • Page 870: Powering On The Ip Video Doorphone

    Issue 10.0 In places where water or other fluids comes in contact with the equipment. In areas near high-frequency machines or electric welders. Near radio antennas (including shortwave). 17.4.5 Powering On the IP Video Doorphone When powering on the Doorphone, it may take up to 60 seconds until a doorphone starts.

  • Page 871: Figure 9-194 2-Wire Connections

    Issue 10.0 Cable Terminals Table 9-11 IP Video Doorphone Cable Terminals Cable Terminal Terminal Name Remarks Not Used Not Used Normally Closed Common Normally Open Figure 9-194 2-Wire Connections The 2-wire is run down the hole in the cable terminal. Do not run the AC power cable within 30cm (11.8 in) of the unit.
  • Page 872 Issue 10.0 The system can support a maximum of eight door stations (including the normal Door box). Refer to the following table for specifications of the IP Video Doorphone. Table 9-13 IP Video Doorphone Specifications Item Specification Feeding System PoE (48V) IEEE802.3af Power Consumption 5W or less Power Supply...

  • Page 873: Adjusting The Camera Angle

    Issue 10.0 17.5.2 Adjusting the Camera Angle Adjustment of the camera is made using an angle adjustment lever in the backside of the Doorphone (camera part). The angle of the camera can be adjusted approximately 15 degrees to each side (upper, right and left). Adjust the visitor image to a position than can be easily viewed.

  • Page 874: Figure 9-196 Angle Adjustment Stand

    Issue 10.0 Figure 9-196 Angle Adjustment Stand To disassemble the Angle Adjustment Stand, press down on  the Mounting Bracket and pull up on the Angle Adjustment Stand at the same time. Figure 9-197 Disassemble Angle Adjustment Stand 9-196 Installing SV9100 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 875: Installing The Ip Video Doorphone

    Issue 10.0 17.5.3 Installing the IP Video Doorphone Figure 9-198 Installing the IP Video Doorphone ❍ The Mounting Bracket, Screw and Screw Cover are attached to the Doorphone Main Body. NOTE ❍ The Wall Mounting Plate is purchased locally by the user. When installing the Doorphone, the Mounting Bracket, screw and screw cover can be removed and installed using the following procedure:...

  • Page 876: Installing The Ip Video Doorphone Using A Wall Mount Bracket (Ip3Ww-Cdh Bracket Set)

    Issue 10.0 Mount the Screw Cover. When there is a gap between the Wall Mounting Plate (on the wall) and the Bracket, the Bracket may be warped due to an over-tightened screw. Simply loosen the screw. 17.5.4 Installing the IP Video Doorphone Using a Wall Mount Bracket (IP3WW-CDH BRACKET SET) This section describes how to install the IP Video Doorphone using a Wall Mount Bracket.

  • Page 877: Figure 9-200 Installing The Ip Video Doorphone Using Wall Cover Set

    Issue 10.0 Attach the Front Cover to the Main Body using the Front Cover fixed screws (Four M3 x 6 screws attach through the sides of Wall Mount Bracket). When there is a gap between the Wall Mounting ❍ Plate (on the wall) and the Bracket, the Bracket may be warped due to an over-tightened screw.
  • Page 878 Issue 10.0 The Rear Bracket is mounted to the Mounting Bracket using Rear Bracket fixed screws (four M3x6mm screws). Insert the Bracket tab into the slot on top of the Main Body. Secure the Main Body and Mounting Bracket with the retaining screws.
  • Page 880 ® SV 9100 System Hardware Manual NEC Enterprise Communication Technologies, Inc. Issue 10.0...